JP2020124531A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing a flow-down mode of game balls.SOLUTION: The game machine includes a first distribution mechanism on a right-side area. Under a situation where a distribution state of the first distribution mechanism is a first distribution state, game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism are supplied to a through winning part and, under a situation of a second distribution state, game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism are supplied to a second special symbol winning device. Reservation information is acquired by a second special symbol reservation area by production of winning of the second special symbol winning device, and a game round is executed by acquisition of the reservation information. In that case, when the game round is executed under a situation where another reservation information is stored in the second special symbol reservation area, a game round is executed across a fixed short period; however, when the game round is executed under a situation where another reservation information is not stored in the second special symbol reservation area, the game round is executed across a fixed long period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 has a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult. A first variable ball entrance means provided switchably;
A second variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult. ,
A predetermined ball entering portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined passage part through which the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance part flows down,
Predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion,
A predetermined giving means for giving a privilege to the player when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means,
The game ball, which is provided on the downstream side of the detection area by the predetermined detection means in the predetermined passage portion and passes through the detection area, is guided to any one of a plurality of areas including the first area and the second area. Guidance means to do so,
A first granting means for causing the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area;
When a game ball flows into the second area, a second granting means for causing the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning device in the non-accepting state, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the first special figure winning device in the accepting state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the branch winning device. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right region. It is a side view of the 1st distribution mechanism and a longitudinal section around the 1st distribution mechanism concerned. It is a front view of the (a)-(c) distribution rotator. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing how the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism and the second distribution mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/loss lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special drawings. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each jackpot result. It is a time chart which shows the winning mode of the game ball in (a1)-(f1) 1st high probability state, and (a2)-(f2) is a time chart which shows the winning mode of the game ball in 2nd high probability state. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure universal communication control process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure fluctuation|variation start process performed in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a universal figure change performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the normal electric power operation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows control processing of the 1st special prize winning device executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows control processing of the 2nd special prize winning device executed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows a prize detection processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a universal figure change performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right side area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right side area in 4th Embodiment. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing how the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism. It is a time chart which shows the winning mode of the game ball in (a)-(e) high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure universal communication control process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure fluctuation|variation start process performed in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a universal figure change performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the normal electric power operation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the display continuation period performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the production determination processing performed by MPU of an audio emission control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times start performed by MPU of a sound emission control device. (A) ~ (c) shows the flow of the game when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism in the shortest firing cycle in the high-frequency support mode and the game times corresponding to the deviation result continue. It is a time chart. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right-hand side area|region in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10 and may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facility of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 such that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 16 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 17 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 17 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 17a is fitted therein. The window panel 17a is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 17a. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 18a is provided above the window portion 17. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 18b for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 17, an upper bulge portion 19a and a lower bulge portion 19b, which bulge toward the front side, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 19a, and a lower plate that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 19b. The upper plate has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate.

The structure of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the guiding means. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) mounted below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a onto the launch rail 27a, and launching. It is provided with a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied onto the rail 27a toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning portion 31, a first special drawing normal winning portion 32, a first special drawing winning device 33, a second special drawing winning device 34, a special electric winning device 35, a through winning portion 36, a branch winning device 37, A variable display unit 40, a special drawing unit 45, and a public figure display section 46 are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through winning part 36, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, with respect to the general winning part 31, the first special figure normal winning part 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the special electric prize winning device 35, and the branch winning device 37, it is predetermined when a ball is generated. The payout of the number of game balls is executed. Regarding the number of the prize balls, specifically, when a ball hits any one of the first special figure normal winning portion 32, the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, and the branch winning device 37. In the case where the payout of three award balls is executed, the payout of the general prize portion 31 occurs, the award of ten prize balls is executed, and the award of the special electric prize winning device 35 occurs. The payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning portions are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening portion, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, the general winning portion 31, the first special figure normal winning portion 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special prize. Balls to the figure winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35, the through winning portion 36, and the branch winning device 37 are also expressed as winning.

The variable display unit 40 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 40 protruding toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, a region in which the game balls shot in the game region PA can flow is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 40 and a variable display unit 40 which is continuous with the upper area PA1 below the upper area PA1. A left side area PA2 that is a left side area, a right side area PA3 that is an area that is continuous below the upper side area PA1 and is on the right side of the variable display unit 40, and a left side area PA2 and a right side area PA3, respectively. On the other hand, a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 40 and which is continuous below the area is partitioned.

As the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Let it flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as the second firing operation with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player is located on the right side of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→the right area PA3→the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game ball by flowing down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3 by adjusting the turning operation amount of the firing operation device 28, and the right side area. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4.

The first special figure normal winning portion 32 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first special figure normal winning part 32 is opened upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first special figure normal winning part 32 is not provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 can always enter the game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first special figure normal winning portion 32. Further, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is arranged immediately below the stage 40a formed in the variable display unit 40, and the game ball that has flowed onto the stage 40a via the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 40. Therefore, the game balls discharged from the center of the stage 40a to the outside of the variable display unit 40 are easy to win the first special figure normal winning portion 32. The first special figure normal winning part 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and the detection sensor 32a detects the game ball that has won the first special figure normal winning part 32.

Here, as described above, the first special figure normal winning part 32 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the right side is on the upstream side toward the right area PA3 with respect to the first special figure normal winning part 32. A restriction nail 24c is provided so that the game ball flowing down the area PA3 cannot reach the first special figure normal winning portion 32. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the left side area PA2, but not for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the left side area PA2, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 can be won, but the right side area PA3 is played. When the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the ball flows down, the winning in the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is not possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and because the restriction nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the right side area PA3, the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 may be awarded.

The first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 are installed in the right area PA3. That is, the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34 cannot win the prize when the firing operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the right side area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, the winning is possible.

The configuration of the first special drawing winning device 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning combination device 33 in the non-accepting state. The configuration of the second special figure winning device 34 is the same as the configuration of the first special figure winning device 33. In the following description, the first special figure winning device will be referred to when describing each member of the second special figure winning device 34. The reference numerals of the corresponding members of 33 are used as they are.

The first special prize winning device 33, the base unit 51 in which the discharge passage 53 for discharging the game ball flowing from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the game area PA is discharged. And a guiding unit 52 for guiding to the passage 53. The inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or larger than one gaming ball and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the outlet portion 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball that has won the first special figure winning device 33.

The guiding unit 52 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the inlet portion 53a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, and into the discharge passage 53. A guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the game ball is not guided and the guide position where the guide is possible (hereinafter, the guide drive unit of the first special prize winning device 33). 56 is also referred to as a first special figure winning drive unit 56a, and a guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is also referred to as a second special figure winning drive unit 56b), and a guide member 55 is arranged at an initial position. The non-blocking position that does not block the flow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position in the blocking position that blocks the flow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 And a blocking member 57 that is disposed at. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction such that the guide member 55 is located below. A transmission unit 58 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

When the guide driving portion 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not project into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is the first. The game area PA flows downward without entering the special figure winning device 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the first special figure winning combination device 33.

When the guide drive portion 56 is driven, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, the guide member 55 is arranged at the guiding position, and the blocking member 57 is not moved. It is placed in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning combination device 33 in the guided state.

When the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position, the tip end side of the guide member 55 projects from the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 to the game area PA side. The amount of protrusion is such that a game ball flowing down in the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA can be received from below. The upper end of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53, so that the game ball received from below on the front end of the guide member 55 is the upper surface of the guide member 55. Will be guided to the inside of the discharge passage 53. Further, when the blocking member 57 is arranged at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that its tip end is located above the blocking position, so that the game is rolled on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The balls flow into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. As a result, the guide driving unit 56 is brought into a driving state, so that the game ball flowing down in the front area of the entrance 53a in the game area PA enters the first special figure winning device 33.

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the guide driving unit 56 of the first special drawing winning device 33 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position is referred to as the first special drawing. It is called the non-accepting state of the winning device 33 (or the closed state of the first special drawing winning device 33, the non-guide state of the first special drawing winning device 33), and the guide driving unit 56 of the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the driving state. The state in which the guide member 55 is arranged in the guide position and the blocking member 57 is arranged in the non-blocking position is the receiving state of the first special figure winning device 33 (or the open state of the first special figure winning device 33, the first special figure winning device 33). The special figure winning device 33 is guided). In addition, the guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position. It is called a non-accepting state (or a closed state of the second special figure winning device 34, a non-guide state of the second special figure winning device 34), and the guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is in a driving state and a guide member. The state in which 55 is arranged at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the non-blocking position is the receiving state of the second special figure winning device 34 (or the open state of the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device). 34 induction state).

The first special drawing winning device 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, and one game ball that passes through the front area of the entrance portion 53a at the same time. It is provided so as to limit the movement to the front and the lateral movement of the game ball to the front of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number to the individual pieces. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being guided into the discharge passage 53 of the first special figure winning device 33 at the same time when the guiding unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the guiding state. At the same time, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the inlet portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guide state. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball flowing into the passage 59a of the cover member 59 passes vertically without flowing into the inlet 53a. To do. This game ball continues to flow down the game area PA as it is.

The winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the first special drawing winning device 33, and the winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34. In addition, a winning lottery is carried out based on the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure normal winning portion 32 provided in the lower area PA4. When the winning lottery is carried out, the special figure unit 45 displays the variation of the design, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

As for the special figure unit 45 in detail, the special figure unit 45 is provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA as shown in FIG. The special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display section 45a and a second special figure display section 45b. In the first special figure display portion 45a, a variable lottery is carried out based on the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special figure winning device 33, thereby performing variable display of the pattern. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 45b, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the second special figure winning device 34, and thereby the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, the first special figure display portion 45a and the second special figure display portion 45b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display device, or another type of display device. Further, as the picture displayed on the first special figure display portion 45a and the second special figure display portion 45b, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed, and the like are possible.

In the special figure unit 45, a first special figure reservation display section 45c and a second special figure reservation display section 45d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display section 45a and the second special figure display section 45b. .. The maximum number of game balls won in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is held up to 4, and the holding number is displayed by turning on the first special figure holding display section 45c. It has become. In addition, the maximum number of game balls that have won in the second special figure winning combination device 34 is reserved, and the number of reserved pieces is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display portion 45d.

Incidentally, the display range of the first special figure display portion 45a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41 described later. Further, the display range of the second special figure display portion 45b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The display range for both the first special figure display part 45a and the second special figure display part 45b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the entire display range of the first special figure display part 45a, the second special figure display part 45b, the first special figure reservation display part 45c and the second special figure reservation display part 45d is also displayed by the symbol display device 41. The area is narrower than the surface. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 is higher than that of the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure reservation display unit 45c, and the second special figure reservation display unit 45d. It is possible to raise it.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 45a, the display effect is performed on the symbol display device 41 provided in the variable display unit 40 in accordance with it, and on the second special figure display unit 45b. Even when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the display effect is also performed in the pattern display device 41 in accordance with it. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect according to the variable display in the special figure display portions 45a and 45b, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode or the display effect in the demo display which is shifted after the winning is won. Is done.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display of the picture is started in the first special figure display section 45a, the effect for game play is started, and when the variable display of the picture is finished in the first special figure display section 45a. The production for game diversion ends. Further, in the symbol display device 41, when the variable display of the picture is started in the second special figure display unit 45b, the effect for game play is started, and the variable display of the pattern is finished in the second special figure display unit 45b. In this case, the effect for game diversion ends.

The display contents when the effect for game play is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers “1” to “9” are respectively attached and shell-shaped designs. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to form the main design.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as a plurality of display areas, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are displayed. It is supposed to be stopped. On the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 6A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5. It is set.

When the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 as an effect for game play, the variable display is started so that the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. It Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the state ends with the predetermined symbols still displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variable display of the symbols ends, and when the result of the internal lottery is the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R described later, the same odd symbol combination is formed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. .. Further, when the result of the internal lottery is the 8R first high-accuracy correspondence result, the 8R second high-accuracy correspondence result or the low-precision correspondence result, which will be described later, the same even number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. A combination of symbols is formed.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34, in any of the special figure display units 45a, 45b and the symbol display device 41. The variation display is started, a predetermined result is displayed, and the variation display is ended until one variation of the game. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

When a big hit is obtained in a winning lottery based on a winning of the first special map normal winning section 32, the first special drawing winning device 33 or the second special drawing winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35 is won. It shifts to the possible open/close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 35 is provided below the first special drawing normal winning portion 32 and above the outlet 24a in the lower area PA4. The position where the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 is such that when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the game ball flows down the right area PA3. It is in a position where a winning is possible even when the firing operation device 28 is operated.

The special electric prize winning device 35 has a big winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and also has an opening/closing door 35a that opens and closes the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 35a is placed in either a closed state or an open state by being driven by the special electric drive unit 35b. Specifically, the opening/closing door 35a is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot win, and when the open/close execution mode is set, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which the game balls can win. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state. The special electric prize winning device 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35c, and the detection sensor 35c detects a game ball that has won the special electric prize winning device 35.

The internal lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is executed upon the winning of the first special figure winning combination device 33 or the second special figure winning combination device 34, as already described. As described above, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 can be switched between a non-accepted state in which the gaming ball cannot be won and a winning state in which the gaming ball can be won. It is a simple structure. In the configuration, the first special figure prize winning device 33 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is changed from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, the branch winning device 37 has a game ball. It is generated by winning a prize. Further, the branch winning device 37 is provided so as to be switchable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, as described later in detail. The trigger to switch the branch winning device 37 from the closed state to the open state is generated by the game ball winning the through winning portion 36.

The through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 are installed in the right side area PA3. In other words, the through winning part 36 and the branch winning device 37 cannot win when the firing operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, a prize can be won.

The through winning portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, the winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated. The through winning portion 36 is provided with a detection sensor 36a, and the detection sensor 36a detects a game ball that has won the through winning portion 36.

Based on the winning of the through winning part 36, the branch winning device 37 is switched to the open state. Specifically, with the winning of the through winning portion 36 as a trigger, the variable display of the pattern is performed on the universal figure display portion 46. More specifically, the public figure display unit 46 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The public figure display unit 46 is configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display, or another type of display device. In addition, as the picture displayed on the public figure display unit 46, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

In the public figure display unit 46, the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the occurrence of the winning in the through winning unit 36. Then, in the first high probability state or the second high probability state, which will be described later, a result corresponding to the branch winning device 37 being opened when the variable display of the pattern is finished is displayed. Further, in the low probability state, internal lottery is performed based on the occurrence of the winning in the through winning part 36, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the normal figure display part 46. If the result of the internal lottery is a win, a result corresponding to the branch prize winning device 37 being opened when the variable display of the pattern is finished is displayed, and if the result of the internal lottery is out, the pattern is displayed. When the variable display ends, the result corresponding to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not opened is displayed.

In addition, the number of winnings in the through winning portion 36 is not stored in a reserved manner. In other words, when a prize is awarded to the through winning part 36 in a situation where the variable display of the pattern can be started on the universal figure display part 46, the variable display of the pattern is displayed on the universal figure display part 46 based on the winning. However, even if a prize is given to the through winning part 36 in a situation where the variable display of the picture cannot be started on the universal figure display part 46, the prize is invalidated and No processing is performed.

The configuration of the branch winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 in addition to FIG. FIG. 7 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the branch winning device 37.

As shown in FIG. 3, the branch winning device 37 includes a branch entrance 61 having a size through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball cannot pass through the branch entrance 61 when the game ball cannot pass through the branch entrance 61. A branch-side opening/closing member 62 is provided for switching to a possible open state. The branch side opening/closing member 62 is opened by being driven by a branch entrance drive unit 63 through a link mechanism (not shown).

After the game ball that has won the branch entrance 61 is guided to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface of the game board 24, as shown in FIG. 7, in the branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the branch prize device 37. Derived. The branch passage 65 is continuous with an inlet region 65a formed so as to extend vertically downward from an inlet portion of the branch passage 65 and a downstream side end portion of the inlet region 65a, and the passage direction extends in the middle of the branch passage 65. An upstream passage region 65b that is set to be inclined downward in the lateral direction, and a first lead-out region 65c that is continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage region 65b and that is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward. And a second derivation region 65d provided by branching from an intermediate position of the first derivation region 65c, and a first derivation region that is continuous with downstream end portions of the first derivation region 65c and the second derivation region 65d. It has a discharge area 65e for discharging the game ball that has passed through 65c and the game ball that has passed through the second lead-out area 65d to the back side of the game board 24.

The inlet region 65a, the upstream passage region 65b, the first lead-out region 65c, and the second lead-out region 65d all have a dimension in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction of one game ball or more and less than two game balls. Has become. This prevents the game balls from passing through these regions 65a to 65d in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction.

A branch prize detection sensor 66a for detecting a game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 is provided at a boundary portion between the entrance area 65a and the upstream passage area 65b. The branch winning detection sensor 66a is an electromagnetic induction type sensor, and outputs a HI level signal to the main control device 101 described later when the game ball exists in the detection area, and the game ball exists in the detection area. If there is not, a LOW level signal is output to main controller 101 described later. The type of the branch winning detection sensor 66a is arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

When the main controller 101 receives the signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the branch prize detection sensor 66a, the payout of the three game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls for the prize to the branch prize device 37 is executed. To perform the process. Specifically, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is transmitted to a payout control device 107 described later. In this way, the branch prize detection sensor 66a is provided in the entrance area 65a, and when the branch prize detection sensor 66a detects the game ball, the payout of the game ball corresponding to the prize to the branch prize device 37 is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the processing for executing the game is executed, it is possible to immediately pay out the game balls when a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37.

A switching piece 67 for guiding the game ball, which has flown into the first derivation region 65c, to the second derivation region 65d is provided at a branch point of the first derivation region 65c to the second derivation region 65d. The switching piece 67 is rotatably supported in a region on the side opposite to the second derivation region 65d side with respect to the first derivation region 65c in the base body 64, and is wholly retracted outside the first derivation region 65c. It is possible to displace between the retracted position and the guiding position that projects into the first lead-out area 65c. The driving force of the switching drive unit 68 is transmitted to the switching piece 67 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 68 is in the non-driving state, the switching piece 67 is placed in the retracted position by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 68 is brought into the driven state. The switching piece 67 is displaced against the biasing force and is arranged at the guiding position.

When the switching piece 67 is arranged in the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 flows down the first lead-out area 65c without being guided to the second lead-out area 65d. Then, the game ball is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e after being detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 67 in the first lead-out area 65c. It On the other hand, when the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 is received from below by the switching piece 67. The upper surface of the switching piece 67 in the state of being arranged at the guiding position is inclined downward toward the second lead-out area 65d. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 67 flows into the second derivation region 65d by its own weight and flows down the second derivation region 65d. Then, the game ball is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e after being detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c provided in the second lead-out area 65d.

The first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are electromagnetic induction type sensors, and when a game ball is present in the detection area, output a HI level signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, for detection. When the game ball does not exist in the area, a LOW level signal is output to the main controller 101 described later. The first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c may be of any type, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Even if the main control device 101 receives the signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first trigger detection sensor 66b, it does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. Similarly, even if the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the second trigger detection sensor 66c, it does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. On the other hand, as described above, the main control device 101 executes the process for paying out the game ball when the signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball is received from the branch winning detection sensor 66a. In other words, when a prize is generated in the branch prize device 37, the winning game ball is immediately detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a, so that the process for paying out the game ball is executed. After the processing is executed, the game ball is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. As a result, the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger can be executed while immediately executing the processing for executing the payout of the game balls when a prize is paid to the branch winning device 37. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom when designing the passage configuration until the game ball is detected by any of the detection sensors 66c.

When the main control device 101 receives the signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first trigger detection sensor 66b, it basically executes the process for bringing the first special figure winning device 33 into the acceptance state. Thereby, it is possible to win the first special figure winning device 33. Further, when the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the second trigger detection sensor 66c, it basically executes the process for bringing the second special figure winning combination device 34 into the acceptance state. Thereby, it is possible to win the second special figure winning device 34.

The internal space of the branch winning device 37 is formed by the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 (see FIG. 3) being assembled in the front and rear. The transparent cover 69 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The transparent cover 69 forms a passage wall of the branch passage 65 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the switching piece 67 is present at a position between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69. The surface of the transparent cover 69 is exposed on the front side of the game board 24 as shown in FIG. More specifically, the transparent cover 69 is provided such that the surface of the transparent cover 69 is flush with the area around the transparent cover 69 on the board surface of the game board 24. That is, the surface of the transparent cover 69 constitutes a part of the game area PA. Since the transparent cover 69 is provided in this manner, the game ball that has flowed into the branch winning device 37 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The operating position of the switching piece 67 is also visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, it is also visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the game ball that has flowed into the branch winning apparatus 37 is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. However, since the branch entrance drive unit 63 and the switching drive unit 68 are provided on the back side of the base body 64, they are not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The branch winning detection sensor 66a, the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but some or all of these detection sensors 66a to 66c are invisible. It may be configured to be.

The branch prize device 37 is attached to the game board 24 from the back side of the game board 24, and the screw fixing portion of the branch prize device 37 to the game board 24 is present on the back side of the game board 24. .. Therefore, in order to remove the branch winning device 37 from the game board 24, it is necessary to release the screw fixing from the back side of the game board 24. Further, the releasing operation for the screw fixing of the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 is set so that the screw fixing portion can be performed when the branch winning device 37 is removed from the game board 24. Therefore, when the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 are separated during maintenance of the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to first remove the branch winning device 37 from the back side of the game board 24. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the transparent cover 69 from the base body 64.

Next, the flow of the game balls in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA will be described. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side area PA3 in an enlarged manner.

As described above, the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right area PA3. The first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning part 36, and the branch winning device 37 are all arranged at midway positions in the vertical direction of the right side area PA3, and the through winning part 36 is further provided. Is arranged on the left side, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is on the center side in the horizontal direction, and the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are on the right side.

In the right side area PA3, on the upstream side of the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning part 36 and the branch winning device 37, the game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 are passed through. A distribution unit 70 for sequentially allocating to the winning portion 36 side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 side is provided. .. The distribution unit 70 includes a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72. The configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described. FIG. 9 is a side view of the first distribution mechanism 71 and a vertical sectional view around the first distribution mechanism 71. The configuration of the second distribution mechanism 72 is the same as the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, and in the following description, the description of each member of the second distribution mechanism 72 corresponds to that of the first distribution mechanism 71. The reference numerals of each member are used as they are.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a distribution rotating body 81 for distributing the game balls that have flowed in from the upstream. FIG. 10A to FIG. 10C are front views of the distribution rotator 81. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the distribution rotator 81 includes a shaft portion 82, and is located at a central position in the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 rather than the shaft portion 82. The ball distributing portion 83 is integrally formed so as to project outward. The ball distribution portion 83 projects outward from the shaft portion 82 over the entire circumference of the axis line.

The distribution rotator 81 is arranged so that the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 is the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the shaft portion 82 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is rotatably supported around the axial direction of the portion 82. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9, the shaft portion 82 of the distribution rotator 81 exists on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24, but the ball distribution of the distribution rotator 81 is large. Part 83 of the portion existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shaft portion 82 is projected forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 through an opening 24d formed in the game board 24. In addition, since the distance between the portion of the ball distributing portion 83 protruding toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the peripheral portion of the opening 24d is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball flowing down the game area PA is It does not get caught between the ball distributing portion 83 and the peripheral portion of the opening 24d.

In the portion of the ball distribution unit 83 projecting to the front of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball flowing down the game area PA and guided to above the ball distribution unit 83 will collide from above. .. Although the detailed configuration will be described later, the outer peripheral surface of the ball distributing portion 83 is formed so that the collision force from above is used as the rotational force of the distribution rotating body 81. Therefore, each time the game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotor 81 rotates in a predetermined direction. This predetermined direction is a counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG.

In this way, the distribution rotator 81 rotates in a predetermined direction each time a game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, but only 120° is distributed for rotation due to the collision of one game ball. The rotation amount of the body 81 is limited so that the body 81 rotates, and the rotation position of the distribution rotating body 81 is held at the position where the rotation amount is limited. With respect to the configuration, specifically, the first sorting mechanism 71 includes a rotation restricting piece 84. The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided at a position on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution rotating body 81. The rotation restricting piece 84 includes a shaft portion 85 and a restricting plate portion 86 integrally formed so as to project in a direction orthogonal to the shaft portion 85. The rotation restricting piece 84 is arranged such that the axial direction of the shaft portion 85 is the same as the axial direction of the distribution rotator 81, and the shaft portion 85 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is rotatably supported around the axial direction of 85.

The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided with a spring member 87 as an urging unit that urges the rotation restricting piece 84. Although the rotation restricting piece 84 is biased by the spring member 87 toward the side that rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG. 9, the rotation stop member 88 contacts the restricting plate portion 86 from the original side in the biasing direction. By making contact with each other, further rotation of the rotation restricting piece 84 is blocked. The position where the regulation plate portion 86 abuts on the rotation stopping member 88 from the original side in the biasing direction is the initial position of the rotation regulation piece 84.

The ball distribution portion 83 of the distribution rotator 81 is arranged so that it can come into contact with the regulation plate portion 86 of the rotation regulation piece 84 arranged at the initial position from the front side in the urging direction of the spring member 87. The contact projections 89a to 89c are integrally formed on the. The contact protrusions 89a to 89c are provided at intervals of 120° when viewed in the rotation direction of the distribution rotor 81. Incidentally, these abutting projections 89a to 89c are provided at positions that do not interfere with the distribution of the game balls, which will be described later, by the ball distribution unit 83.

The regulation plate portion 86 of the rotation regulation piece 84 arranged at the initial position is present on the passage of each of the contacting projections 89a to 89c accompanying the rotation of the distribution rotor 81. Therefore, when the distribution rotator 81 rotates in the predetermined direction, the abutting protrusions 89a to 89c existing at positions close to the regulation plate portion 86 contact the regulation plate portion 86 from the original side in the rotation direction. Contact.

Here, the urging force for urging the rotation restricting piece 84 to the initial position is such that when one game ball collides with the ball distributing portion 83 from above, one contacting projection 89a to 89c is the regulating plate portion. 86 is pushed in the rotational direction to allow the abutting projections 89a to 89c to move to positions on the front side in the rotational direction with respect to the regulating plate portion 86, while the abutting projections 89a to 89c are The abutting projections 89a to 89c arranged at the next position come into contact with the regulating plate portion 86 that has returned to the initial position so that further movement is blocked. That is, in the state of FIG. 9, when one game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotation body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction by the rotational force of the collision, and the contact projection 89a. Pushes out the regulation plate portion 86. As a result, the rotation restricting piece 84 rotates in the opposite biasing direction from the initial position. After that, the contacting projection 89a moves further in the predetermined direction as the distribution rotor 81 rotates in the predetermined direction, so that the contacting projection 89a moves to a position where it does not contact the regulation plate portion 86. Then, the rotation restricting piece 84 returns to the initial position. After that, the contact projection 89b located on the base side in the rotation direction of the predetermined direction contacts the restriction plate portion 86 with respect to the contact projection 89a that first contacts the restriction plate portion 86. At this time, since the rotational force of the distribution rotary body 81 due to the collision of one game ball is weakened to some extent, the distribution rotor is distributed by the contact of the contact projection 89b with the regulation plate portion 86. The rotation force of 81 is received by the rotation restricting piece 84. As a result, further rotation of the distribution rotator 81 is blocked. Further, since the distribution rotator 81 is formed such that the center of gravity thereof is located at the center of rotation, the abutment projection 89b comes into contact with the regulation plate portion 86, so that the distribution rotator 81 is further rotated. If is blocked, the ball distribution unit 83 waits at the blocked rotational position until the game ball newly collides.

With the above configuration, each time one game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotator 81 rotates 120° and stands by at the position rotated by 120°. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(c), different spherical vibrations are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the spherical distribution unit 83 at intervals of 120° when viewed in the rotation direction of the distribution rotor 81. Minute regions 91 to 93 are formed. Then, at each of the stop positions of the distribution rotator 81 at every 120°, the parts in which the different ball distribution regions 91 to 93 are formed are projected to the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. Becomes Each of the ball distribution areas 91 to 93 will be described below.

FIG. 10A shows a state in which the portion in which the first ball distribution area 91 is formed in the ball distribution unit 83 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the first ball distribution area 91, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided from above with the ball distribution unit 83 is changed to the left and the force when the game ball collides is rotated by the distribution rotor 81. A leftward guiding portion 95 is integrally formed so as to be converted into force. The leftward guiding portion 95 projects outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distributing portion 83. Further, the leftward guiding portion 95 is formed by an edge wall portion 95a that extends around the axis along the right edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83 and a rotator for sorting that is continuous from the edge wall portion 95a. When 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball, the inclined wall portion 95b is provided on the left edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 toward the rotation destination side. When the game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in the situation where the first ball distribution region 91 exists at the front position, the game ball is moved to the right by the edge wall portion 95a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 95b in a regulated state. By colliding with the inclined wall portion 95b, the game ball receives a drag force toward the left side, and the flow direction is changed toward the left side of the ball distributing portion 83, and the left side of the ball distributing portion 83 is changed. It flows down from the position of. Further, the distribution rotator 81 rotates 120° counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 95b.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the part in which the second ball distribution area 92 is formed in the ball distribution part 83 projects toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the second ball distribution area 92, while maintaining the downward flow direction of the game ball that has collided from above from the ball distribution portion 83, the force at the time of collision of the game ball of the distribution rotor 81 is maintained. A central guiding portion 96 is integrally formed so as to be converted into a rotational force. The central guiding portion 96 projects outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distributing portion 83. Further, the central guiding portion 96 includes a pair of edge wall portions 96 a and 96 b extending around the axis along each of the left edge and the right edge on the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83, and the second ball distribution region 92. An intermediate step portion 96c is formed so as to project slightly outward at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. When the game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in the situation where the second ball distribution region 92 exists in the front position, the game ball is generated by the pair of left and right edge wall portions 96a and 96b. It collides with the intermediate step portion 96c in a state in which the movement to the left and right is restricted. Although the game ball receives a drag toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by colliding with the intermediate step portion 96c, the game ball is directed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the window panel 17a arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 24. The movement is restricted, and the water flows downward as it is. Further, the distribution rotator 81 is rotated 120° counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the intermediate step portion 96c.

FIG. 10C shows a state in which the portion in which the third ball distribution area 93 is formed in the ball distribution unit 83 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the third ball distribution area 93, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided from above with the ball distribution unit 83 is changed to the right, and the force when the game ball collides is rotated by the distribution rotor 81. A rightward guiding portion 97 is integrally formed so as to be converted into force. The rightward guiding portion 97 projects outwardly from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distributing portion 83. Further, the rightward guiding portion 97 is formed by an edge wall portion 97a that extends around the axis along the left edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83 and a rotator for sorting that is formed continuously from the edge wall portion 97a. When 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball, the inclined wall portion 97b is provided on the right edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 as it goes toward the rotation destination side. When the game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in the situation where the third ball distribution region 93 exists in the front position, the game ball is moved to the left by the edge wall portion 97a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 97b in a regulated state. By colliding with the inclined wall portion 97b, the game ball receives a reaction force directed to the right, and the downward direction is changed toward the right of the ball distribution unit 83, and the game distribution ball is located on the right side of the ball distribution unit 83. It flows down from the position of. Further, the distribution rotator 81 rotates 120° counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 97b.

With the above configuration, every time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball is to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 → Vertically downward of the first sorting mechanism 71 → Rightward of the first sorting mechanism 71 → Leftward of the first sorting mechanism 71 → Vertically downward of the first sorting mechanism 71 → Rightward of the first sorting mechanism 71 → The left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 is sequentially changed in this order. That is, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of 1 to 3 and a ratio of 1 to 3. Are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one in three.

As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution mechanism 71 having the above configuration is provided in the most upstream part of the right side area PA3. The position where the first sorting mechanism 71 is provided in the right side area PA3 is formed so that the center frame 40b provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 40 projects to the right. As a result, the game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 are always passing positions, and the game balls are passing one by one. As a result, the game balls flowing from the upper side area PA1 to the right side area PA3 are always supplied to the ball distributing portion 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71. Then, as described above, the game balls supplied to the ball distributing unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three, and three game balls are distributed. The first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of 1 to 3, and to the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of 1 to 3.

The right area PA3 is provided with a first guide rail 99a for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71. The second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at a position where the game balls are guided by the first guide rail 99a, and the game balls are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the first guide rail 99a. Reliably reaches the second sorting mechanism 72.

The second distribution mechanism 72 has the same configuration as the first distribution mechanism 71 as already described. Therefore, every time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first guide rail 99a, the distribution direction of the game ball is to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72. →Vertical lower side of the second sorting mechanism 72 →Right side of the second sorting mechanism 72 →Left side of the second sorting mechanism 72 →Vertical lower side of the second sorting mechanism 72 →Right side of the second sorting mechanism 72 -> The left side of the 2nd distribution mechanism 72 -> is changed in order in order. That is, the game balls supplied from above by the first guide rail 99a to the ball distributing unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed to the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72 at a ratio of one to three. One in three is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72, and one in three is distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72.

The right area PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 99b for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower left position of the second distribution mechanism 72. The through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 99b, and the game ball guided to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the second guide rail 99b is sure. In the through prize winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, the winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA and continues to flow down as it is in the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 will flow vertically downward, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 existing on the right side of the through winning portion 36, the first special figure winning device. It is not guided to 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

The right area PA3 is provided with a third guide rail 99c for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 to a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. The branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c, and is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the third guide rail 99c. The game ball surely wins the branch winning device 37 if the branch winning device 37 is in the open state. As described above, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and then the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second derivation that are present on the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. After being detected by one of the second trigger detection sensors 66c existing in the area 65d, the second trigger detection sensor 66c is discharged to the rear surface side of the game board 24. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state, and when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special prize device 34 is in a receiving state.

On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c while the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state, the game ball continues to flow down in the game area PA without winning the branch winning device 37. To do. In this case, since the game ball that has passed in front of the branch side opening/closing member 62 of the branch winning device 37 will flow vertically downward, the through winning portion 36, which is located laterally of the branch winning device 37, the first The special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not guided.

The right area PA3 is provided with a fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower right position of the second distribution mechanism 72. At the position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are vertically arranged side by side. In addition, the fourth guide rail 99d is provided with a game ball distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and a game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are formed so as to be guided to the juxtaposed position.

The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are vertically arranged side by side with the first special figure winning device 33 facing upward. The passage portion 59a formed by the cover member 59 of the first special drawing winning device 33 and the passage portion 59a formed by the cover member 59 of the second special drawing winning device 34 are present on the same axis, and the passage portion 59a is the fourth portion. It exists on the same axis as the exit portion of the guide rail 99d. Further, the distance between the exit portion of the fourth guide rail 99d and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the first special prize winning device 33 is less than one game ball, and the first special prize winning device 33. The distance between the exit portion of the passage portion 59a and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 is also less than one game ball. Therefore, when the game ball guided by the fourth guide rail 99d is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33, and the game ball does not enter the first special figure winning device 33, The game ball is surely guided to the passage portion 59a of the second special prize winning device 34.

When the game ball is guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special prize winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d when the first special prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state, the game ball is the first special map. The winning device 33 will be won. In addition, when the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-accepting state and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, a game ball is provided in the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d. When is guided, the game ball passes through the passage portion 59a of the first special drawing winning device 33 and flows into the passage portion 59a of the second special drawing winning device 34, and then enters the second special drawing winning device 34. It will be a prize.

On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d in a situation where both the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is the first special prize. The game area PA after passing through the passage portions 59a of both the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34 without winning the figure special winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34. Continue to flow. In this case, the game balls that have passed through the passage portions 59a of both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 will flow vertically downward, so that the first special figure winning device 33 and It is not guided to the through winning part 36 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 which are present on the right side of the 2 special figure winning device 34.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 11, how the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 will be described. FIG. 11A shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11B shows the period during which the game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 11C shows a period in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11D shows the game balls are distributed rightward by the first distribution mechanism 71. 11E shows the period, FIG. 11E shows the timing when the game balls are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11F shows the game balls distributed to the left by the second distribution mechanism 72. 11G shows a period, FIG. 11G shows a period in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11H shows a game by the second distribution mechanism 72 toward the right. Indicates the period during which the ball is distributed.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 11A, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 are sorted toward the left side of the first sorting mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b) and FIG. 11(c), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left to a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the following order.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a provided in the game area PA. Since the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at the guide destination by the first guide rail 99a as described above, the game ball is placed in the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 11(e). Supplied. At the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 11(f), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed toward the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. As shown in (f) and FIG. 11(g), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left to a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the following order.

The game ball distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided by the second guide rail 99b provided in the game area PA. Since the through winning portion 36 is provided at the destination guided by the second guiding rail 99b as described above, this game ball is surely won in the through winning portion 36. When a prize is paid to the through winning part 36, the variable display of the pattern is started on the universal figure display part 46.

Then, at the timing of t4, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 11(a). At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 11C, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, so that the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t5, FIG. As shown in (c) and FIG. 11(d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward to a state in which game balls are distributed rightward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the following order. The game ball supplied vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game region PA, At this timing, both of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so that neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 Game balls do not win.

After that, at the timing of t6, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 11(d), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls toward the right. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11D, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed to the right to a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the following order. The game ball supplied to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game region PA, At this timing, both of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so that neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 Game balls do not win.

Then, at the timing of t8, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 are sorted toward the left side of the first sorting mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2, the first distribution mechanism 71 moves to the left at the timing of t9 as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C. The state is changed from the state in which the game balls are distributed toward the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game ball is distributed to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 11(e). Is supplied. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 11(g), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t10, FIG. As shown in (g) and FIG. 11(h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward to a state in which the game balls are distributed rightward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the following order.

The game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the third guide rails 99c provided in the game area PA. The branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at the destination guided by the third guide rail 99c as described above. In addition, if the gaming ball is supplied to the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) in any of the high probability states described later, the timing of t9. By this time, the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 has been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is surely opened. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the three game balls won in the through winning part 36 are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 71. At the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 through the distribution mechanism 72, the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and the winning of the branch winning device 37 occurs. The game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 is immediately detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a, and the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (specifically, 0. It is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c before a period shorter than 6 seconds) elapses.

After that, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 occurs at the timing of t11 to the timing of t14. Thereby, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 11(c) and FIG. 11(d), from the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward, the game balls toward the right. 11B, and at the timing of t14, the state of distributing the game balls to the right is changed to the state of distributing the game balls to the left as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11D. To do. In addition, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 and the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t13 are both juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Will be guided to. In this case, the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 is the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11, which is the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Before being guided to, the player has already won the branch winning device 37 and is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special prize winning device 33 is detected. The prize winning device 34 changes from the closed state to the open state. When the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the open state, the open state is changed to the closed state on condition that two game balls are won. Therefore, the game balls that are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided through the fourth guide rail 99d at the timings t11 and t13, respectively, are the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34. The prize is given to the side that is open. Since two game balls are to be won in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the condition for transitioning to the closed state is established, and the open state is changed to the closed state.

After that, at the timing of t15, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 are sorted toward the left side of the first sorting mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2 and the timing of t9, the first distribution mechanism 71 is at the timing of t16, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the first distribution mechanism 71. Changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left to a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game ball is distributed to the second distribution mechanism 72 as shown in FIG. 11E at the timing of t16. Is supplied. At the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 11(h), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the right. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. As shown in (f) and FIG. 11(h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed to the right to a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the following order.

The game ball distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. At the destination guided by the fourth guide rail 99d, there is a juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 as described above. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special prize winning devices 33, 34, the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 33 Since both the special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

However, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 is in the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 before the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 to be opened are in the open state. When guided, the game ball does not win the special figure winning device 33, 34. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33, 34, one of the special drawing winning devices 33, 34 is still in play. Since it is in the open state, the game ball will win the special figure winning device 33, 34 in the open state. Thereby, due to the fact that the detection timing of the game ball in the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c is later than the expected timing depending on the movement mode of the game ball in the branch winning device 37, Even if the transition to the open state of the figure winning devices 33, 34 is delayed, before the distribution state in the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 returns to the distribution state toward the through winning part 36. In addition, it is possible to surely generate the winning of the two game balls, which is the upper limit number of winning, in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 which are the opening targets.

After that, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 and the timing of t11 to t14 occurs from the timing of t18 to the timing of t21. Thereby, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 11(c) and FIG. 11(d), from the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward, the game balls toward the right. And a state in which the game balls are distributed to the right as shown in FIG. 11(b) and FIG. 11(d) while the game balls are distributed to the left at the timing of t21. To do.

In this case, all of these game balls will be guided to the juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. At this guided timing, both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are No game ball wins in any of the 34.

Here, the distribution state of the game ball is sequentially changed every time the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Similarly, the second distribution mechanism 72 sequentially changes the distribution state of the game balls each time a game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Further, only the game balls distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72. Then, in order for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one round, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the state of FIG. 11, the timing of t21 is the timing when nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 counting from the timing of t1, but the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t21. By changing the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t22 by the game ball supplied to 71, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes the distribution state at the timing of t1. At the timing of t22, the distribution state of the second distribution mechanism 72 also becomes the distribution state at the timing of t1. That is, in one of the high-probability states described later, a winning cycle of winning the through winning portion 36 →winning the branch winning device 37 →winning the first special drawing winning device 33 or the second special drawing winning device 34 occurs. In order to do so, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the right side area PA3.

In this case, the number of award balls of one game ball to the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, and the branch prize device 37 is 3 for all of the winning game balls. Further, when the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the open state, the winning state of the two game balls occurs, and thus the state is closed. Furthermore, when the game balls are supplied to the right side area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), within the range of 9 game balls for generating the winning cycle. After the game balls to be won in the branch winning device 37, there are two game balls to be won in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. As a result, if any one of the high-probability states described later is generated, the nine winning game balls for generating the winning cycle cause the branch winning device 37 to win one game ball and become open. It is possible to generate a prize for two game balls in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and in this case, nine game balls are paid out. Therefore, the winning cycle can be continued without reducing the number of game balls possessed by the player.

As shown in FIG. 8, the second distribution mechanism 72 in the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33, 34. The passage length dimension of the passage region below is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the third guide rail 99c for guiding the game balls distributed by the second distribution mechanism 72 to the branch entrance 61. ing. As a result, until the game balls distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 pass through the lateral positions of the second distribution mechanism 72 and reach the juxtaposed region of the special prize winning devices 33, 34. It is possible to secure a longer time than the time required for the game balls distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 to win the branch entrance 61. This makes it possible to secure a long minimum period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 after the winning of the branch winning device 37.

Even if a game ball enters the branch winning device 37, the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the receiving state until the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. There is no. In this case, since the shortest period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed region of the special drawing prize devices 33 and 34 after the prize is generated in the branch prize device 37 is secured, the branch prize device By the time the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the next order of the game balls to be won in 37 reach the juxtaposed region of the special prize winning devices 33, 34, either special prize is won. It is possible for the devices 33 and 34 to have completed the transition to the receiving state.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 101 that controls the main control of the game is mounted. The main controller 101 has a main control board housed in a board box. It should be noted that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion that inseparably joins a plurality of case bodies constituting a substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or peeling off when an adhesive layer remains on an object to be adhered at the time of peeling. It is conceivable to attach a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 101. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 102 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 103 and the control device assembly unit 104 are attached to the back pack 102.

The payout mechanism unit 103 includes a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game ball paid out from the payout device 106 is discharged to the upper plate or the lower plate through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism unit 103 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device gathering unit 104 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, as well as a payout control device 107 having a function of controlling the payout device 106, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply/launching control device 108 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 107 and the power supply/launch control device 108 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 107 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 101 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main game control, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and each may be configured into an individual chip. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 101.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 112, the power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 101 is connected, and the payout controller 107 is connected. A power supply/launch control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 35c, 36a, 54, 66a, 66b, 66c (hereinafter, also referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c) are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c include a general winning portion 31, a first special drawing normal winning portion 32, a first special drawing winning device 33, a second special drawing winning device 34, a special electric winning device 35, a through winning portion 36, and the like. A detection sensor provided in a winning-corresponding ball portion such as the branch winning device 37 is included, and the MPU 112 determines winning of each winning-ball portion. In the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning apparatus 33, the second special figure winning apparatus 34 or the through winning section 36.

The payout control device 107, the power failure monitoring board 115, and the sound emission control device 121 are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. To the payout control device 107, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of winning determination to the winning-corresponding ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 121. Details of these various commands will be described later.

On the output side of the MPU 112, a first special prize winning driving section 56a for operating the first special prize winning device 33 between a receiving state and a non-receiving state, and a second special prize winning device 34 are in a receiving state. And a non-acceptance state, a second special prize winning drive unit 56b, a special electric drive unit 35b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 35a of the special electric prize device 35, a branch of the branch winning device 37. A branch entrance drive unit 63 for opening/closing the side opening/closing member 62, a switching drive unit 68 for operating the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37, a special drawing unit 45, and a public figure display unit 46 are connected. ing. Incidentally, the special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display section 45a, a second special figure display section 45b, a first special figure reservation display section 45c and a second special figure reservation display section 45d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, when the opening condition of the branch winning device 37 is satisfied, the drive control of the branch entrance drive unit 63 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the switching piece The drive control of the switching drive unit 68 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the 67 executes a predetermined operation described later. Further, when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37, the first special figure winning drive unit in the MPU 112 is set so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. The drive control of 56a is executed. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the drive unit for the second special prize in the MPU 112 so that the second special prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state. The drive control of 56b is executed. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the drive unit 35b for special electricity so that the special electricity winning device 35 is opened/closed. In addition, at the time of game play, display control of the special drawing unit 45 is executed in the MPU 112. Further, when a prize is awarded to the through winning part 36, the MPU 112 controls the display of the universal figure displaying part 46.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply/launch control device 108, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 108. The payout control device 107 controls payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

The power supply/launch control device 108 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 107 and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly operated. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 101. The power supply/launch control device 108 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The sound emission control device 121 includes a sound emission control board 122 on which the MPU 123 is mounted. The MPU 123 includes a ROM 124 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 123 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 124 is executed. A certain RAM 125, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are built in.

The MPU 123 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the opening/closing execution mode, etc., based on the command received from the main control device 101. Then, the display light emitting unit 18a provided in the front door frame 14 is controlled to emit light so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 18b provided in the front door frame 14 is performed. I do.

The MPU 123 is electrically connected to the display control device 126. The MPU 123 transmits to the display control device 126 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 101 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 101. The display control device 126 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU 112 of main controller 101>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information at the time of a game, and hits lottery, setting of display of the first special figure display portion 45a, setting of display of the second special figure display portion 45b, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, general The display of the graphic display unit 46 is set, and more specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the hit random number counter C1 used in the lottery for winning and the jackpot used in determining the jackpot type. The type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates, and the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure display unit. 45a, 45b and the variation type counter CS that determines the display duration time in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the branch winning apparatus 37 is opened in the low probability state described later is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 131 of the RAM 114.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 indicates that the winning of the first special figure normal winning portion 32, the first special figure winning device 33, or the second special figure winning device 34 has occurred. In this case, it is stored in the special figure reservation area 132. The special figure reservation area 132 includes a first special figure reservation area 133, a second special figure reservation area 134, and a special figure execution area 135.

The first special map reservation area 133 includes a first area 133a, a second area 133b, a third area 133c, and a fourth area 133d, and is provided to the first special map normal winning portion 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33. Numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 133a to 133d as pending information on the special drawing side in accordance with the winning history.

In this case, in the first area 133a to the fourth area 133d, when the winnings to the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 occur successively a plurality of times, the first area 133a→ Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the second area 133b→the third area 133c→the fourth area 133d. Since the four areas 133a to 133d are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four. It has become.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 134 is provided with a first area 134a, a second area 134b, a third area 134c and a fourth area 134d. Numerical value information of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in any of the areas 134a to 134d as reserved information on the special drawing side.

In this case, in the first area 134a to the fourth area 134d, when the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34 occurs successively, the first area 134a→the second area 134b→the third area 134c. →Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area 134d. Since the four areas 134a to 134d are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four.

The number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be two or three, or five or more other numbers. , May be singular.

In the special figure execution area 135, when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display parts 45a and 45b, the pending information of the target for the special figure right/wrong determination or the distribution determination is stored. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display portion 45a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 133a of the first special figure reservation area 133 is moved to the special figure execution area 135. To be done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display portion 45b is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 134a of the second special figure reservation area 134 is moved to the special figure execution area 135.

The information corresponding to the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is stored in the execution area 136 for a general figure provided in the RAM 114 when a prize is given to the through winning portion 36. The execution area 136 for a general figure is the ordinary electric random number counter C4 that is referred to in the lottery process for determining whether or not the branch winning device 37 is opened in response to the winning of the through winning part 36 in a low probability state described later. This is an area where numerical information is stored. In the execution area 136 for a general figure, when a prize is awarded to the through prize winning part 36 during a valid winning period during which the prize to the through prize winning part 36 is valid in a low-probability state described later, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 Numerical information of is stored.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Particularly, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33. The game balls are stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 of the special figure reservation area 132 at the timing of winning the second special figure winning device 34. Then, the hit/miss determination processing is performed using the stored value of the hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the win/loss determination process is stored in the ROM 113 as a win/loss table. In the hit/miss table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the hit/miss results. The jackpot result is a win/loss result that triggers the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 35 is controlled to open/close, and also triggers the transition to the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode. The disengagement result is a win/fail result that does not trigger the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and further does not trigger the shift in the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode.

As the win/loss table, there are a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is acquired based on the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first special map normal winning portion 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33 and the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34. The same win/loss table is referred to by the reserved information and the low probability mode and the high probability mode exist as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery in any case.

Explaining each win/loss table in detail, the win/loss table for the low-probability mode has two random number values (eg, “5” and “305”) that result in a big hit. Then, the other values are random number values that result in deviation. In the high probability mode win/loss table, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set to be larger than in the low probability mode win/loss table, and specifically 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420 , "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode.

It should be noted that if the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, then the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and if the jackpot result is in the low-probability mode, The value group of the hit random number counter C1 may or may not include only a part of the value group of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33. The game balls are stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 of the special figure reservation area 132 at the timing of winning the second special figure winning device 34. Then, the distribution determination processing is performed using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the winning/losing lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) the opening/closing. At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the execution mode ends is different.

The opening/closing execution mode is a gaming state in which the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 35 is executed to make it possible to win the special electric prize winning device 35. In the opening/closing execution mode, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that a special electric prize winning device 35 is opened for a predetermined number of times with a predetermined special electric open period as an upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls is the special electric prize winning device. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions for winning 35 is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the open/close execution mode is set to 16 times, and in each round game, the special electric prize winning device 35 having the special electric open period of 29 sec and the upper limit number of 10 is opened 1 Only executed once. In this case, as described above, in the situation where the player operates the firing operation device 28, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Since it is controlled, the special electric open period in each round game is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming to win the special electric prize winning device 35 are normally fired, the special electric prize winning device 35 is won with the number of game balls or more in each round game. Then, each time a prize is won to the special electric prize winning device 35, the payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 35 is executed. Therefore, when the shift to the open/close execution mode occurs, the player is provided with the benefit of an increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

The support mode is a type of game state that determines the frequency at which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed and the execution mode of the opening/closing control when a prize is paid to the through winning part 36. As the support mode, a low frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode, and a second high frequency support mode are set. In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed more frequently in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through winning part 36, than in the low-frequency support mode.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode, the numerical information of the Poden random number counter C4 is acquired when a prize is paid to the through winning part 36, and the acquired numerical information is the numerical information corresponding to the open winning. In this case, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The probability of winning the open prize is arbitrary, but is set to 1/20, for example. In the low-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 transitions to the open state only once, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 at the opening time is a short period equal to or shorter than the game ball firing cycle. It is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the through winning portion 36 is won in the low frequency support mode and the player is awarded an open prize, the probability that the branch winning device 37 is won is low. Further, as described above, even if a win is generated in the through winning part 36 and an open win occurs, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but the winning of the through winning part 36 is triggered. When the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 started as is finished, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds.

In the first high-frequency support mode, the open lottery process is not executed when a prize is awarded to the through winning part 36, and the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. Further, in the first high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 shifts to the open state only once, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 at the opening time is the shooting cycle of the game ball×n (n is It is set to 0.8 seconds, which is a long period of 1 or more). Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode, when the through winning portion 36 is won, the probability that the branch winning device 37 is won is high. The open state of the branch winning device 37 is ended by winning one game ball in the branch winning device 37 even if the open duration has not elapsed.

As described above, the branch winning device 37 is provided with the switching piece 67, and when the switching piece 67 is located at the retracted position, the game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b. When the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guide position, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. In the configuration, when the switching piece 67 is in a state where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically 0.9 seconds) from the start timing of the first opening of the branch winning device 37. Is held in the retracted position until the time elapses, and after the switching standby period elapses, the retracted position is switched to the guide position and is held in the guide position. In the case of such a configuration, in the first high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 is opened while the switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 elapses. The switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position until a timing later than the timing. Furthermore, in the first high-frequency support mode, even if a prize is given to the branch winning device 37 at the timing when the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the game ball retains the switching piece 67 at the retracted position. The game ball passes the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the period. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b. The first special figure winning device 33 is opened.

In addition, even if a win is generated in the through winning part 36, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but in the public figure display part 46 started when the winning in the through winning part 36 is triggered. When the variable display of the pattern is finished, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the first high-frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern is constant at 1.5 seconds, which is a time longer than twice the firing cycle of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, since the variable display period is set to 1.5 seconds, the game balls are supplied to the right side area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). In the through winning portion 36, the game balls in the order of three after the game balls winning the prize are the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72 and the third guide rail 99c. The branch winning device 37 is opened at the timing of being guided to.

In the second high-frequency support mode, the open lottery process is not executed when a prize is paid to the through winning part 36, and the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. In the second high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 transitions to the open state twice, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 is the above-described short period (0.1 seconds) at the first opening. ), and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 is set to the above-described long period (0.8 seconds) in the second opening. Therefore, there is a low probability that the branch winning device 37 will be won in the first opening time, and a high probability that the branch winning device 37 will be won in the second opening time. The open state of the branch winning device 37 is ended by winning one game ball in the branch winning device 37 even if the open duration has not elapsed. In this case, if a prize is awarded to the branch winning apparatus 37 in the first opening, the second opening is not executed. Between the first opening time and the second opening time, there is a closing continuation period in which the branch winning device 37 is kept in a closed state, and this closing continuation period is 0.8 Set to seconds.

As described above, when the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is in a state where the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, from the start timing of the first opening of the branch winning device 37 (specifically, It is held in the retracted position until the elapse of 0.9 seconds), and after the switching waiting period elapses, the retracted position is switched to the guide position and the guide position is maintained. In the case of such a configuration, in the second high-frequency support mode, the switching prize 67 is switched to the guide position and the second opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started while the switch prize 67 is held at the guide position. The switching piece 67 is held at the guide position until the timing after the timing when the opening continuation period of the second opened state has elapsed. Furthermore, in the second high-frequency support mode, even if a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37 at the timing when the opening duration of the second open state elapses, the game ball has the switching piece 67 in the guiding position. It passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the held period. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, and the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Then, the second special figure winning device 34 is opened.

In addition, even if a win is generated in the through winning part 36, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but in the public figure display part 46 started when the winning in the through winning part 36 is triggered. When the variable display of the pattern is finished, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the second high frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds, which is a shorter time than in the first high frequency support mode. As will be described later in detail, the variable display period is set to 0.7 seconds, and the opening duration of the first opening is 0.1 in the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 in the second high frequency support mode. It is a second and the closing duration from the end of the first opening time to the start of the second opening time is set to 0.8 seconds, so that the shortest firing cycle (specifically, In the state where the game balls are supplied to the right side area PA3 in 0.6 seconds), the game balls in the order three behind the game balls to be won in the through winning portion 36 are the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution. At the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the minute mechanism 72 and the third guiding rail 99c, the branch winning device 37 is in the open state by the second opening.

The distribution destination of the kind of the big hit result to the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 113 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b).

As shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), in the distribution table, as the types of the big hit results, the low accuracy correspondence result, the first high accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and the second high accuracy probability of 8R. The correspondence result and the second high-precision correspondence result of 16R are set. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result.

In the low certainty correspondence result, it becomes the opening/closing execution mode in which eight round games occur. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of which win/loss lottery mode was selected before the opening/closing execution mode was entered. Further, this low-probability mode continues until the next big hit result is reached and the switching to the open/close execution mode is performed. Further, after the end of the open/close execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of which of the support modes before the opening/closing execution mode is changed. This low-frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result is reached, and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted accordingly. The gaming state in which the win/loss lot mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is the low-probability state. In the open/close execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of which of the support modes is before and after the shift to the open/close execution mode.

In the 8R first high-accuracy correspondence result, the opening/closing execution mode in which eight round games occur occurs. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of which win/loss lot mode is selected before the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, this high-probability mode continues until the next big hit result is reached and the switching to the open/close execution mode is performed. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which of the support modes is before the opening/closing execution mode. The first high-frequency support mode continues until a big hit result occurs and the switching to the open/close execution mode accordingly occurs. The gaming state in which the win/loss lot mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode is the first high-probability state.

In the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, it becomes the opening/closing execution mode in which eight round games occur. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of which win/loss lot mode is selected before the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, this high-probability mode continues until the next big hit result is reached and the switching to the open/close execution mode is performed. Further, after the end of the open/close execution mode, the second high frequency support mode is set regardless of which of the support modes is before the opening/closing execution mode. This second high-frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result is reached, and the switching execution mode is shifted accordingly. The gaming state in which the win/loss lot mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode is the second high-probability state.

In the 16R second high-accuracy correspondence result, it becomes the opening/closing execution mode in which 16 round games occur. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of which win/loss lot mode is selected before the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, this high-probability mode continues until the next big hit result is reached and the switching to the open/close execution mode is performed. Further, after the end of the open/close execution mode, the second high frequency support mode is set regardless of which of the support modes is before the opening/closing execution mode. This second high-frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result is reached, and the switching execution mode is shifted accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), as the distribution table, the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is distributed. A distribution table for the first special figure used in the minute determination process and a second special map used in the distribution determination process of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the second special figure winning device 34. The distribution table and are set.

Explaining each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 14A, the distribution table for the first special figure has a low probability correspondence result and 8R as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. 1st high-accuracy correspondence result, 8R second high-accuracy correspondence result, and 16R second high-accuracy correspondence result are set. In the distribution table for the first special map, “0 to 19” corresponds to the low-precision correspondence result, “20 to 59” corresponds to the first high-precision correspondence result of 8R, and “60”. "~89" corresponds to the second high-precision correspondence result of 8R, and "90-99" corresponds to the second high-precision correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the sorting table for the first special map, when the jackpot is won, the probability of being a low probability correspondence result is 20%, and the probability of being the first high accuracy correspondence result of 8R is 40%. , 8R has a probability of 30% as the second high-accuracy correspondence result, and 16R has a probability of 10% as the second high-accuracy correspondence result.

Opening and closing when the low probability response result, the first high accuracy response result of 8R or the second high accuracy response result of 8R is obtained based on the winning of the first special map normal winning part 32 or the first special map winning device 33. In the mode, a round game is played with the maximum number of times being 8 times, and in each round game, the special electric prize winning device 35 is opened and closed once. That is, when any of the low probability correspondence result, the first high accuracy correspondence result of 8R and the second high accuracy correspondence result of 8R, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 35 in the opening/closing execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display portion 45a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display portion 45a. The stop result is displayed on the displayed symbol display device 41 in a non-identifiable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the same even number of symbols are stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines on the symbol display device 41. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any one of the low-probability response result, the first high-probability response result of 8R, and the second high-probability response result of 8R, any jackpot result is triggered until the ending period is started. The effect is executed in a manner indistinguishable from whether it is the open/close execution mode. As a result, when the open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed eight times occurs, the player is expected to transition to the first high probability state or the second high probability state after the end of the open/close execution mode. While playing the game while expecting to move to the second high-probability state, which is advantageous to the player, of the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state, Become. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the distribution table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the low-accuracy correspondence result and the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R are set as the types of the jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the distribution table for the second special map, “0 to 19” corresponds to the low-precision correspondence result, and “20 to 99” corresponds to the second high-precision correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the sorting table for the second special map, the probability of a low-probability correspondence result is 20% and the probability of a second high-probability correspondence result of 16R is 80% when the jackpot is won. ..

The distribution table for the first special map and the distribution table for the second special map have the same probability that the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a big hit. On the other hand, the probability that the open/close execution mode in which the round game occurs 16 times is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Furthermore, the probability that the second high-accuracy correspondence result that triggers the transition to the second high-probability state is higher in the distribution table for the second special map than in the distribution table for the first special map. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the internal lottery is performed as compared with the case where a prize is given to the first special figure normal winning portion 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. It is more advantageous for the player when a prize is generated in the second special figure winning combination device 34 and an internal lottery is performed.

The winning modes of the game balls in the first high probability state and the second high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 16(a1) to FIG. 16(f1), the winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state will be described. FIG. 16(a1) shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right side area PA3, FIG. 16(b1) shows the winning timing for the through winning part 36, and FIG. 16(c1). 16(d1) shows a period during which the branch winning system 37 is in an open state, and FIG. 16(e1) shows a winning timing to the branch winning system 37. FIG. 16 (f1) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the guiding position.

By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a situation where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be played in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right side area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right side area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the 1st distribution mechanism 71 as it did. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(a1), at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, and the timing of t8, the game ball is delivered to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle. Supplied.

At the timing of t1, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the through winning part 36. Therefore, the first distribution mechanism is generated at the timing of t1. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning part 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 16(b1). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(c1), the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 is started at the timing of t2. The variable display period of the variable display of this pattern is 1.5 seconds.

After that, at each of the timing t3 and the timing t4 in the situation in which the variable display of the pattern is continued on the universal figure display unit 46, the game balls are placed in the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a1). Supplied. In this case, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34, and therefore, at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, The game balls supplied to the one-sorting mechanism 71 are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

After that, at the timing of t5, the variable display of the picture on the general figure display portion 46 is finished as shown in FIG. 16(c1). Since the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode in the first high-probability state, at the timing of t5 when the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is finished, as shown in FIG. Is opened. This open state continues for a maximum of 0.8 seconds. Further, as the first opening of the branch winning device 37 is started at the timing of t5, the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 16(f1).

After that, at the timing of t6 which is the situation where the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a1). In this case, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, and therefore, at the timing of t6. The game balls supplied to the 1-sorting mechanism 71 win the branch winning apparatus 37 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 16(e1).

The game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 finishes passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in a period shorter than the shortest firing cycle. In this case, if no prize has been awarded to the branch winning device 37, the branch winning device 37 is kept open until the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 16(d1). Further, even if the game ball is won in the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t9 which is the timing when the branch winning device 37 shifts to the closed state, the switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position until the timing of the subsequent t10. The period from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 is longer than the longest period required for the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 to finish passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67. Therefore, in the first high-probability state, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 has finished passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in the situation where the switching piece 67 is arranged in the retracted position, so that the first It will be detected by the trigger detection sensor 66b. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning combination device 33 is in a receiving state.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a1). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t8. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, since the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state at this guiding timing, the winning of the first special figure winning device 33 occurs.

Depending on the flow-down mode of the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 in the branch winning device 37, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8 are the special figure winning devices 33, 34. There is a possibility that the first special figure winning combination device 33 is not in the accepting state at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed region. Even in this case, since the supply of the game balls supplied to the right side area PA3 to the through winning portion 36 occurs in a cycle of nine pieces, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the timing of t8 until the state becomes the distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Then, all these four game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. Therefore, two or more game balls are guided to the first special figure winning combination device 33 in the receiving state before the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Therefore, by the time the game balls are guided to the through winning part 36, the upper limit winning number of game balls is won to the first special figure winning device 33, and the first special figure winning device 33 is accepted. The state will shift to the non-accepting state. As long as the variable display of the symbols is not displayed on the universal figure display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. As a result, the winning of the through winning part 36 is validated. In this case, as described above, when the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls to the first special figure prize device 33 is completed within the range of the nine game balls supplied to the right side area PA3, the through winning part is achieved. In the state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make the winning in the through winning part 36 valid.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a2) to FIG. 16(f2), a winning mode of the game ball in the second high probability state will be described. FIG. 16(a2) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right side area PA3, FIG. 16(b2) shows the timing for winning the through winning part 36, and FIG. 16(c2). 16(d2) shows the period during which the branch prize winning device 37 is in the open state, and FIG. 16(e2) shows the winning timing of the branch prize winning device 37. FIG. 16 (f2) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the guiding position.

By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a situation where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be played in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right side area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right side area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the 1st distribution mechanism 71 as it did. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(a2), at each of the timing of t11, the timing of t13, the timing of t16, the timing of t17, and the timing of t20, the first distribution mechanism 71 is played with the shortest firing cycle. The sphere is supplied.

At the timing of t11, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the through winning part 36, so the first distribution mechanism is generated at the timing of t11. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning part 36 at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 16(b2). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(c2), the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is started at the timing of t12. The variable display period of the variable display of this pattern is 0.7 seconds.

After that, at the timing of t13, which is the situation in which the variable display of the pattern is continued on the universal figure display unit 46, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t13. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

After that, at the timing of t14, the variable display of the picture on the public figure display portion 46 is finished as shown in FIG. 16(c2). Since the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode in the second high-probability state, at the timing of t14 when the variable display of the picture on the general-picture display unit 46 is finished, as shown in FIG. Is the first open state. Since the open duration in this open state is 0.1 seconds, it is unlikely that a prize will be awarded to the branch winning device 37. Furthermore, in the opening continuation period of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 in relation to the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. It will not be done. Therefore, the first open state of the branch winning apparatus 37 started at the timing of t14 ends at the timing of t15 without the winning of the branch winning apparatus 37, and the branch winning apparatus 37 is closed.

Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started when the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(f2), the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing of t14.

After that, at the timing of t16, which is the state of the closing continuation period in which the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is maintained, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t13. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

Then, at the timing of t17, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a2). In this case, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, so at the timing of t17, The game balls supplied to the one-sorting mechanism 71 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. In this configuration, the closing continuation period elapses at the timing of t18, which is a timing before the timing at which the game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, and branches as shown in FIG. 16(d2). The winning device 37 is opened for the second time. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(f2), the arrangement state of the switching piece 67 is switched from the retracted position to the guide position at the timing of t18.

At the timing of t19, which is the situation where the branch winning device 37 is in the second open state and the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guiding position, the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 16(e2). The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 win the branch winning device 37. Since this game ball has finished passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in the situation where the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guiding position, it is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. When the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special figure winning combination device 34 is in the receiving state.

After that, at the timing of t20, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16(a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t20. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposed region of each special figure winning device 33, 34. In this case, since the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state at this guiding timing, a prize is awarded to the second special figure winning device 34.

At the timing of t19, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t20 are the special figure winning devices 33, 34 depending on the flowing-down mode of the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 in the branch winning device 37. There is a possibility that the second special figure winning a prize device 34 is not in the receiving state at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed region. Even in this case, since the supply of the game balls supplied to the right side area PA3 to the through winning portion 36 occurs in a cycle of nine pieces, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the timing of t20 until the state becomes the distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Then, all these four game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. Therefore, two or more game balls will be guided to the second special figure winning combination device 34 in the receiving state before the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning part 36, the upper limit winning number of game balls is won to the second special figure prize device 34, and the second special figure prize device 34 is accepted. The state will shift to the non-accepting state. As long as the variable display of the symbols is not displayed on the universal figure display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. As a result, the winning of the through winning part 36 is validated. In this case, as described above, when the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 is completed within the range of the nine game balls supplied to the right side area PA3, the through winning part In the state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make the winning in the through winning part 36 valid.

As described above, in the first high-probability state, the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 are reliably detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state and the second high probability state. In the probability state, the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 are reliably detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, so that the second special figure winning device 34 enters the receiving state. As described above, the lottery process is performed by the MPU 112 triggered by the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 as compared with the case where the lottery process is executed by the MPU 112 triggered by the winning of the first special diagram winning device 33. When executed, the distribution mode of the jackpot result is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the second high-probability state can have a more advantageous gaming state than the first high-probability state.

By each operation of the 1st distribution mechanism 71 and the 2nd distribution mechanism 72, the game ball supplied to the right side area PA3 after the three game balls won in the through winning part 36 is supplied to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. Be induced. As a result, it is possible to fix the number of game balls required from the occurrence of a prize in the through winning portion 36 to the occurrence of a prize in the branch winning device 37 to three.

In this case, in the first high-probability state, the variable display period of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is fixed to 1.5 seconds which is the variable display period for the first high-probability state. In addition, when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the open state has an opening continuation period so that the branch winning device 37 can win. It is set to 0.8 seconds. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being kept at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. R. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after the three game balls won in the through winning portion 36. By doing so, it is possible to win a prize in the branch winning device 37, and the game ball can be detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b.

In the second high-probability state, the variable display period of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 second which is the variable display period for the second high-probability state. Also, when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the first opening time, and the open state prohibits the winning of the branch winning device 37. The open duration is set to 0.1 seconds. After that, the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state for 0.8 seconds which is the closing continuation period, and when the closing continuation period elapses, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the second opening time. In this open state, the open continuation period is set to 0.8 seconds so that the branch winning apparatus 37 can win the prize. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being kept at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. R. Since this switching waiting period elapses at the timing when the closing continuation period of the branch winning device 37 passes, the switching piece 67 is moved from the retracted position to the guiding position at the timing when the branch winning device 37 is in the open state by the second opening. Can be switched. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after three of the game balls won in the through winning portion 36. By doing so, it is possible to win a prize in the branch winning device 37, and the game ball can be detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c.

On the other hand, in the low-probability state, the variable display period of the picture in the general figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds. Further, when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the open duration of the open state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this configuration, even if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three game balls won in the through winning portion 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the branch entrance 61, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is closed. Therefore, even if the branch winning device 37 can be opened in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible to win the branch winning device 37.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. Note that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numbers is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines regarding the assignment correspondence result.

Two types of expected effects are set, a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in a stage before the reach display occurs. In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying a combination of reach symbols, and the symbols in the remaining symbol strings in that state. The display state of performing variable display of is included. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the reach display is performed by displaying the variable symbols in the remaining symbol columns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire symbol display device 41 to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, since the variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol columns and a plurality of symbols. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in columns, a mode is included in which the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Further, the background screen may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be predetermined modes different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display may occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game game corresponding to the jackpot result. Further, in the game times corresponding to the out-of-match result, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. To be executed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the MPU 112 but by the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121. In this case, in the MPU 123, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to cause the notice display and the notice rates having a lower appearance rate are more likely to occur than the game times corresponding to the miss result. The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions. By the way, this lottery result is reflected in the case where the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 112 determines the display continuation period in the first special figure display unit 45a or the second special figure display unit 45b and the display continuation period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is used when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the first special figure display part 45a or the second special figure display part 45b and when the symbol display device 41 starts fluctuation of the symbol. To be acquired.

Next, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 will be described. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is regularly updated, and is stored in the execution area 136 for general purposes at the timing when the game ball wins the through winning portion 36 in the low probability state. Then, by using the stored numerical information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the branch winning device 37 in the open state.

<Assumption of processing configuration in MPU 112>
Next, each process executed by the MPU 112 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits for 1 sec after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 114 is permitted, and the internal function register of the MPU 112 is set in step S103.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 108 is manually operated, and in subsequent step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 114. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 114 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 114. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S108 is not executed but step S109 is performed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121 in order to recognize the current game state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these updating processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 114, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the MPU 112 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 111 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a frequency divider circuit is provided so as to be present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 112. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 112. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 112 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 milliseconds. The MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and activates and executes the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is activated when the interrupt is changed from the disabled state to the enabled state. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 112, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 milliseconds after the last timer interrupt process was started, and when such an event occurs, The next timer interrupt process will be started 3.9 milliseconds after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 milliseconds regardless of the progress of processing in the MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is In the timer interrupt processing in, the amount exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing at the next timing, the timer interrupt processing is activated at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

In a succeeding step S202, lottery random number updating processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal electric random number counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1, respectively, A process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In a succeeding step S205, a fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing of step S207 and thereafter is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting to the various driving units 35b, 56a, 56b, 63, 68 corresponding to the output information is executed. To do. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 35 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 35b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. If the information for switching the first special figure winning combination device 33 to the receiving state is set, output of the drive signal to the first special figure winning combination driving unit 56a is started to switch to the non-receiving state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the second special figure winning a prize device 34 to the receiving state is set, output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning award driving unit 56b is started to switch to the non-accepting state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the branch winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 67 to the retracted position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 is started, and when the information for switching to the guiding position is set, the relevant information is set. Stop the output of the drive signal.

In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors 32a to 66c are read, and the general winning portion 31, the first special figure normal winning portion 32, the first special drawing winning device 33, and the second special drawing winning. A process of identifying whether or not there is a ball in the device 34, the special electric winning device 35, the through winning portion 36, and the branch winning device 37 is executed.

In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 114 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information is aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are aggregated and performed. It may be configured.

In a succeeding step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation is continued to the firing operating device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

In a succeeding step S212, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 32a to 66c and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. To do.

In a succeeding step S213, special figure special electric power control processing for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

In a succeeding step S214, a general/universal/general electric power control process for executing display control of the general/universal figure display unit 46, drive control of the branch/prize winning apparatus 37, and the like is executed. The processing content of the universal figure/universal control processing will be described later in detail.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the first special figure display section 45a on the first special figure hold display section 45c. The setting and output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the second special figure display section 45b on the second special figure hold display section 45d are set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display portion 45a and the second special figure display portion 45b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. The output information for updating the display content of the public figure display unit 46 is set.

In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 107 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In a succeeding step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed.

When a positive determination is made in step S206 or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process is ended.

<Universal diagram control system processing>
Next, the universal figure/universal communication control processing executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) of the MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the information of the universal figure universal communication counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S301), and the universal figure universal communication address table stored in the ROM 113 is also read (step S302). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the universal figure universal telephone counter is acquired from the universal figure universal telephone table (step S303).

The normal/universal figure electric power control process monitors presence/absence of a prize in the through/winning unit 36 and changes the normal/universal pattern to start the variable display of the pattern in the general/universal display unit 46 upon the winning in the through/winning unit 36. The start process (step S305) and the general figure changing process for updating the variable display of the picture on the general figure display unit 46 and for starting the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 when the variable display period has elapsed (step S306). ) And the normal electric power operation process (step S307) for executing the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 are set. In such a processing configuration, the universal figure/universal phone counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the above-mentioned plural types of processes should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-described plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the universal figure counter. The general/universal/general-purpose counter will be triggered by the condition that the numerical information currently stored should be updated when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information has been completed, and the general/universal/universal counter in the next processing 1 is added or "0" is cleared according to the processing executed in the power control processing. Therefore, in the universal/universal communication control process at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute a process according to the numerical information set in the universal/universal communication system counter. It should be noted that "0" is set as an initial value of the universal figure/universal counter.

After executing the process of step S303, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S303 is executed in step S304. Specifically, when the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “0”, the processing jumps to the universal figure variation start processing of step S305, and when the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “1”, the step If the value of the universal figure/universal phone counter is “2”, the process jumps to the universal figure in-flight process in step S306.

In the general/universal/universal electric power control process, after performing any of the processes of step S305 to step S307, a process for executing the opening/closing control of the first special figure winning combination device 33 (step S308), and the second special figure. The processing for executing the opening/closing control of the winning device 34 (step S309) is executed. Hereinafter, each process of step S305 to step S309 will be described in detail.

<Universal figure fluctuation start processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the universal figure variation start process executed in step S305 in the universal figure universal control process (FIG. 19).

First, it is determined whether or not the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401). The state in which the acceptance control of one of the special prize winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed means that the first special prize winning is triggered by the detection of the game ball by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37. Situation in which the condition for making the device 33 in the accepting state is satisfied (including the condition in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state), and the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 The situation (including the situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state) corresponds to the condition that the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the accepting state upon the detection of. If the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401: YES), it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through winning part 36 (step S402). The general-universal-picture variation start processing is ended without executing. As a result, in a situation in which the winning control of one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed, the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalidated, and even if the winning of the through winning part 36 occurs, The variable display of the pattern on the graphic display unit 46 is not started, and the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not executed.

Here, the universal figure variation start process is not executed in a situation in which the variation display of the picture is being performed in the universal figure display unit 46 and a situation in which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being performed. Then, even in these situations, the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalidated. That is, the situation in which the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is being executed, the situation in which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed, and the acceptance control of one of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 is executed. The winning of the through winning portion 36 is invalidated in the situation where the winning prize is present, and the winning of the through winning portion 36 is validated in the other situations. In this case, the winning of the through winning part 36 is enabled even in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode, when an effective winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the same processing as the low frequency support mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the same processing as the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is executed when an effective winning is generated in the through winning part 36. Alternatively, in the opening/closing execution mode, the winning of the through winning part 36 may be invalidated.

In a situation where the acceptance control is not executed for both the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 (step S401: NO), and the winning of the through winning portion 36 occurs. (Step S402: YES), by checking whether or not "1" is set in the flag corresponding to any of the high probability states in the RAM 114, it is determined whether the high probability state or the second high probability state. It is determined whether or not (step S403). When it is in the low probability state (step S403: NO), the open lottery process is executed (step S404). In the open lottery processing, the current numerical value information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is read to the ordinary area execution area 136. Then, the table for open lottery is read from the ROM 113, and it is grasped by referring to the table for open lottery whether or not the numerical information read out in the execution area 136 for general purpose is the numerical information corresponding to the open win. The grasped result is stored in the RAM 114. Then, the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the low probability state is set in the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S405). On the other hand, in the case of the first high-probability state (step S403 and step S406: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the variation display period for the first high-probability state is calculated as the universal variation measurement of the RAM 114. The counter is set (step S407). In the case of the second high-probability state (step S403: YES, step S406: NO), the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the variable display period for the second high-probability state is displayed in the RAM 114 as a general map. The fluctuation measurement counter is set (step S408). The value set in the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the universal figure variation measurement counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 identifies the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46.

After performing any one of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is started (step S409). In this case, even when any of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408 is executed, the aspect of the pattern displayed on the general figure display unit 46 at the start timing of the variable display of the pattern is the same. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 in the same manner in any of the situations, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load. It should be noted that, before the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 46 is started, it is assumed that the display of the pattern finally stopped and displayed in the previous variable display time of the pattern on the general figure display unit 46 is continued. Is becoming After that, 1 is added to the value of the Uzu-Uden counter (step S410). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 19) is the universal figure changing process (step S306).

<Processing during changes in the universal map>
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the universal figure changing process executed in step S306 in the universal figure universal control process (FIG. 19).

In the process of changing the universal figure, if the value of the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S501: NO), it means that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46. Therefore, the display content update process is executed (step S502). In the update processing of the display content, the pattern displayed on the general figure display section 46 is updated to the next order of patterns, provided that it is the timing to update the display content of the general figure display section 46. In this case, the pattern update mode is constant irrespective of whether it is in the low probability state, the first high probability state, or the second high probability state, and in the low probability state, the open lottery process determines that the winning symbol is released. Regardless of whether or not the pattern has been updated, the pattern is constantly updated. This makes it possible to update the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 in the same manner in any of the situations, thus reducing the processing load.

If it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES), if it is in the low probability state (step S503: NO), step S404 in the universal figure variation start process (FIG. 20) is released. In the lottery processing, it is determined whether or not the winning is open (step S504). When it is not the open winning (step S504: NO), the value of the universal figure/universal counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S505). As a result, the execution target of the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 19) is the universal figure variation start process (step S305).

When it is in the low probability state (step S503: NO) and when the open win has been obtained (step S504: YES), the normal electricity release number counter provided in the RAM 114 is set to “1” and is also provided in the RAM 114. Numerical information corresponding to the short open period of 0.1 seconds is set in the general electric open period counter (step S506). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES) and the first high probability state (step S503 and step S507: YES), the universal battery of the RAM 114 is used. The release counter is set to "1", and the general electric open period counter of the RAM 114 is set to numerical information corresponding to the long open period of 0.8 seconds (step S508). In addition, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES) and the second high probability state (step S503: YES, step S507: NO), the RAM 114 is stored. "2" is set to the universal power release number counter, and numerical information corresponding to the short open period of 0.1 seconds is set to the universal power release period counter of the RAM 114 (step S509). The normal electric opening number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of times the branch winning device 37 is opened in a situation where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The normal electric opening period counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining maximum period until the branch winning device 37 is closed when the branch winning device 37 is opened. The value set in the normal power open period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the ordinary electric opening period counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is determined that it is the end timing of the present opening time in the branch winning device 37.

When any one of step S506, step S508, and step S509 is executed, the process of switching to the retracted position is executed (step S510). In the switching process, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the guiding position to the retracted position by starting the output of a drive signal to the switching driving unit 68 of the branch winning device 37. Further, numerical information corresponding to the switching standby period of 0.9 seconds is set in the switching standby counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S511). The value set in the switching standby counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the switching standby counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is determined that it is the timing to switch the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position.

After that, the opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S512). In the opening process, the branch side opening/closing member 62 is displaced to the open position by starting the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. When the branch winning apparatus 37 is opened, "1" is set to the open state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can identify whether the branch winning apparatus 37 is in the open state by confirming whether the open state flag is set to "1".

Further, the numerical information corresponding to the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is set in the monitoring period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S513). During the monitoring period of the opportunity prize, when a game ball is detected by either the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the detection of the game ball is due to an illegal act. It is a period that serves as a standard for determining whether or not. When a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c during the measurement of the trigger winning monitoring period, the detection of the game ball is treated as normal, and the trigger winning monitoring is performed. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c after the period has elapsed, the detection of the game ball is treated as abnormal. If the trigger winning monitoring period is the first high-probability state, the opening winning period in one opening of the branch winning device 37 and the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 are the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger. It is set as a period equal to or longer than the sum of the longest period assumed to be detected by any of the detection sensors 66c. Specifically, it is set to 2.0 seconds. In the second high probability state, the opening continuation period in the first opening time in the branch winning device 37, the closing continuation period between the first opening time in the branch winning device 37 and the second opening time, As an opening continuation period in the second opening time in the branch winning device 37, and a period until the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. It is set as a period equal to or longer than the sum of the expected maximum period. Specifically, it is set to 3.0 seconds. By thus setting the monitoring period of the opportunity prize, it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 is legitimate. It becomes possible to do.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the universal figure/genuine counter of the RAM 114 (step S514). As a result, the execution target of the general/universal-university control process (FIG. 19) becomes the general-university-operation-in-progress process (step S307).

<Processing during normal operation>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the process during the universal communication operation executed in step S307 in the universal pattern universal communication control process (FIG. 19).

When the branch winning device 37 is in the open state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37, thereby winning the branch winning device 37. It is determined whether or not has occurred (step S602). When no prize has been paid to the branch winning device 37 (step S602: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the universal electric open period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, so that the branch winning device 37 It is determined whether or not the opening continuation period of this opening time has elapsed (step S603).

When the open duration period has elapsed (step S603: YES), the value of the universal electric open frequency counter of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S604). When the value of the ordinary electric power open counter after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S605: NO), the branch winning device 37 is closed (step S606). In the closing process, the branch side opening/closing member 62 is displaced to the closed position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. When the branch winning device 37 is closed, the open state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0". After that, numerical information corresponding to the closing continuation period of 0.8 seconds is set in the normal electric closing period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S607). The value set in the general electric closing period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal electric closing period counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is determined that the closing continuation period in the branch winning device 37 has elapsed.

Similar to step S606 when a prize has been paid to the branch winning device 37 (step S602: YES), or when the value of the normal electric power open counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S605: YES). The closing process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S608). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. After that, "1" is set to the opening end flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S609). The opening end flag specifies in the MPU 112 that the transition from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning apparatus 37 has been completed in the opening/closing control of this time in the branch winning apparatus 37 triggered by winning the through winning section 36. It is a flag for doing.

When the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the universal electric closing period counter of the RAM 114 is "0" to determine the closing duration of the branch winning device 37. Is determined (step S610). When the closing continuation period has elapsed (step S610: YES), similar to step S512 in the universal figure changing process (FIG. 21), the opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S611). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. Further, in the opening process, numerical information corresponding to the long opening period of 0.8 seconds is set in the universal electric opening period counter of the RAM 114. As a result, in the present opening time, the branch winning device 37 is opened for 0.8 seconds at the maximum.

In the normal power operation process, it is determined whether the switching standby period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the switching standby counter of the RAM 114 is "0" (step S612). When the switching standby period has elapsed (step S612: YES), the process of switching to the guidance position is executed (step S613). In the switching process, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the retracted position to the guiding position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch winning device 37. Then, "1" is set to the switching completion flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S614). The switching completion flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify that the switching of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position has been completed.

In the normal electric power operation process, when "1" is set to both the opening end flag and the switching completion flag of the RAM 114 (step S615: YES), the value of the general electric power consumption counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0". (Step S616). As a result, the execution target of the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 19) is the universal figure variation start process (step S305). Further, in step S616, the opening end flag and the switching completion flag are cleared to "0". The value of the universal figure/universal counter is cleared to “0” on condition that both the opening end flag and the switching completion flag are set to “1”, and the winning of the through winning part 36 is triggered. Regarding the situation of opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37, in the opening/closing control of this time, the transition from the open state of the branch winning device 37 to the closed state is completed, and the arrangement of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position is completed. It ends with that.

<Control processing of first special prize winning device 33>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a control process of the first special figure prize winning device 33 executed in step S308 in the normal/universal power control process (FIG. 19).

When the 1st special figure winning a prize device 33 is not in the acceptance state (step S701: NO), on the condition that the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S702: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is being measured (step S703).

When the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S703: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the detection of the game ball this time by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b is legitimate. "2" is set to the first special prize winning counter (step S704). The first special figure prize counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining winning number of game balls required for switching the first special figure prize device 33 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state. In step S704, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the acceptance state by setting "2" to the first special figure prize winning device 33, the first special figure prize winning device 33 has two games. When the ball wins, the first special figure winning device 33 enters a non-accepting state. After that, the acceptance start process of the first special figure winning combination device 33 is executed (step S705). In the acceptance start processing, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56a for the first special figure winning prize is started to bring the first special figure winning combination device 33 into the accepting state. When the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the receiving state, "1" is set to the first special drawing side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can determine whether or not the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the receiving state by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the first special drawing side receiving state flag. Becomes

On the other hand, in step S703, when the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the opportunity prize has been completed, the first opportunity detection sensor 66b detects the game ball this time. Means that is not authentic. Therefore, after the abnormality notification command is set as the transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S706), an infinite loop is entered. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 121 executes processing for causing the abnormality notification to be executed in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. As a result, the fact that the abnormality detection has occurred in the first trigger detection sensor 66b is notified. Further, by entering the infinite loop, execution of processing for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is blocked. The state of the infinite loop is canceled by executing the process of step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

When the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state (step S701: YES), it is determined whether or not a win has occurred to the first special figure winning device 33 (step S707). When a prize is generated in the first special figure winning combination device 33 (step S707: YES), the value of the first special figure winning counter of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S708). When the value of the first special figure winning award counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S709: YES), the acceptance ending process of the first special figure winning a prize device 33 is executed (step S710). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 56a for the first special figure winning prize is stopped, so that the first special figure winning combination device 33 is brought into the non-receiving state. When the first special diagram winning device 33 is set in the non-accepting state, the first special diagram side receiving state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0".

<Control processing of second special drawing winning device 34>
24 is a flowchart showing a control process of the second special figure winning combination device 34, which is executed in step S309 in the normal/university/general electric power control process (FIG. 19).

When the second special drawing winning device 34 is not in the receiving state (step S801: NO), it is a condition that the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S802: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is being measured (step S803).

When the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S803: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the detection of the game ball this time by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is normal. "2" is set to the second special prize winning counter (step S804). The second special figure prize counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining winning number of game balls required for switching the second special figure prize device 34 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state. In step S804, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state by setting "2" to the second special figure prize winning device, the second special figure prize device 34 has two games. The second special figure winning device 34 enters a non-accepting state when the ball wins. After that, the acceptance start processing of the second special prize winning device 34 is executed (step S805). In the acceptance start processing, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for winning the second special figure is started, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is brought into the accepting state. When the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the second special drawing side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to "1". The MPU 112 can determine whether or not the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the receiving state by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the second special drawing side receiving state flag. Becomes

On the other hand, in step S803, when the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the trigger prize has been completed, the second trigger detection sensor 66c detects the game ball this time. Means that is not authentic. Therefore, after setting the abnormality notification command as the transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S806), an infinite loop is entered. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 121 executes processing for causing the abnormality notification to be executed in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is notified that the abnormality detection has occurred in the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Further, by entering the infinite loop, execution of processing for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is blocked. The state of the infinite loop is canceled by executing the process of step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S807). When a prize has been awarded to the second special figure prize winning device 34 (step S807: YES), the value of the second special figure prize counter of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S808). When the value of the second special figure winning award counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S809: YES), the acceptance ending process of the second special figure winning a prize device 34 is executed (step S810). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 56b for the second special figure winning prize is stopped, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is brought into the non-accepting state. When the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the non-accepting state, the second special figure side receiving state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0".

<Winning monitoring process>
Here, the winning detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning part 36 (step S901: YES), the value of the universal figure/universal counter of the RAM 114 is "0" (step S902: YES). ), "1" is set to the through winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S903). As a result, in the situation in which the variable display of the picture is being performed in the public figure display portion 46 and the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being performed, the winning of the through winning portion 36 is invalidated. Further, the MPU 112 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize winning portion 36 by determining whether or not the through prize flag is set to "1" in step S402 in the universal figure variation start process (FIG. 20). Determine whether or not. In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the through winning flag is cleared to "0" even if the processing in step S402 and subsequent steps is not executed. As a result, when one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is in the accepting state, the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalidated. Also, when the positive determination is made in step S402, the through winning flag is cleared to "0". By the way, even if one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning part 36, the process for paying out the game ball is not executed.

When one game ball is detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a of the branch prize device 37 (step S904: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter provided in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S905). The three prize ball counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of transmissions of the three prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 107 to pay out the three game balls. If the value of the three award ball counter is 1 or more at the transmission possible timing, one three award ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 107 and the value of the three award ball counter is decremented by one. To be done. After that, the branch winning flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S906). The MPU 112 determines in step S602 in the normal power operation process (FIG. 22) whether or not the branch winning device 37 is won by determining whether or not the branch winning flag is set to "1". To judge. When an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the branch winning flag is cleared to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S907: YES), "1" is set to the first trigger winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S908). .. In step S702 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special prize winning device 33, the MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the first trigger winning flag, and thus the first trigger detection sensor 66b. At, it is determined whether a game ball is detected. If an affirmative decision is made in step S702, the first opportunity prize flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the process for paying out the game ball is not executed.

When one game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S909: YES), "1" is set to the second trigger winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S910). .. In step S802 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special prize winning device 34, the MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the second trigger winning flag, whereby the second trigger detection sensor 66c. At, it is determined whether a game ball is detected. If an affirmative decision is made in step S802, the second opportunity prize flag is cleared to "0". By the way, even if one game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the process for paying out the game ball is not executed.

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 32a of the first special figure normal winning portion 32 (step S911: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S905). S912). As a result, processing for executing the payout of the three game balls is executed. After that, "1" is set to the first special prize winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S913). In the special map special electric power control process (FIG. 26), by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first special map prize flag, the first special map normal winning section 32 or the first special map winning device 33 It is determined whether or not the winning of one game ball has occurred. By the way, in the case of executing the process corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the first special map normal winning portion 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33 in the special map special electric control process (FIG. 26), The figure winning flag is cleared to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the first special prize winning device 33 (step S914: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S915). ). As a result, processing for executing the payout of the three game balls is executed. After that, the first prize flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S916), and the first special figure prize flag of the RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S917). The first special map winning flag is as described above. The MPU 112 determines whether or not the first prize flag is set to "1" in step S707 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special prize winning device 33. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the first winning flag is cleared to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special prize winning device 34 (step S918: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S919). ). As a result, processing for executing the payout of the three game balls is executed. After that, "1" is set to the second prize flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S920), and "1" is set to the second special figure prize flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S921). The MPU 112 determines whether or not the second prize flag is set to "1" in step S807 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special prize winning device 34, so that the second special prize winning device 34 It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the second winning flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 26), by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag, one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 It is determined whether a winning has occurred. By the way, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26), when the process corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is executed, the second special figure winning flag is cleared to “0”. ..

In the winning detection process, other processes are executed in addition to the above processes (step S922). In the other processing, when a prize is generated in the general winning portion 31, processing for causing the corresponding number of game balls to be paid out is executed, and the detection sensor 35c of the special electric prize winning device 35 is executed. When one game ball is detected as a result, a process for causing the corresponding number of game balls to be paid out is executed.

<Special map special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special power control process, first, a process of acquiring the hold information is executed (step S1001). In the reservation information acquisition process, when "1" is set to the first special figure prize flag of the RAM 114, it is determined that the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 has won a prize. To do. In this case, if the upper limit number of pieces (specifically, four pieces) of holding information is not stored in the first special figure holding area 133, each numerical value of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The information is stored in the first area of the free areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure reservation area 133. Further, in the reservation information acquisition processing, if the second special figure winning flag of the RAM 114 is set to "1", it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, 4) of holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134, each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The information is stored in the first area of the empty areas 134a to 134d of the second special drawing reservation area 134.

After that, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1002), and the special figure special power address table is read from the ROM 113 (step S1003). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special telephone counter is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table (step S1004).

The special figure special electric control processing, the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1006) in order to start the production for game round, the special figure fluctuation processing in order to advance the production for game round (step S1007), The special figure finalizing process for ending the game game effect (step S1008), the special electric power starting process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode opening (step S1009), and the special electric prize winning device 35 being opened The special electric open process for controlling (step 1010), the special electric closing process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 35 (step S1011), the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the end of the opening/closing execution mode The special electric power ending process (step S1012) for controlling the transition of the gaming state is set. In such a processing configuration, the special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the above-described plural types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special electric counter. The special map special electric counter controls the special figure special electric control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared according to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter. In addition, the special map special electric counter is set to "0" as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S1004, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1004 is executed in step S1005. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S1006. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the pending information is stored on hold, and the game times in which the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 and the special figure display units 45a and 45b are started. Perform the processing for. The details will be described later.

If the value of the special figure special power counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure changing process in step S1007. In the special figure changing process, the process of determining whether it is the timing before the final stop display during the display continuation period of the game time is executed. If it is before the final stop display, it changes in the current game time. A process for regularly changing the display mode of the patterns on the special figure display parts 45a and 45b to be displayed is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing, if it is not the final stop display timing, after performing the process for regularly changing the above, this special figure The changing process ends. Therefore, after the production for game use is started, the special figure changing process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. Further, when it is the time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from that corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure fixing process. Update to the corresponding one.

If the value of the special figure special power counter is "2", the process jumps to the special figure fixing process in step S1008. In the special figure finalizing process, in order to display the final stop display of the stop result of the current game time on the symbol display device 41, a final stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121, and the variable display target is set in the current game time. The display mode of the design on the special figure display portions 45a and 45b is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. Further, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the period during the final stop display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. If the switching to the open/close execution mode occurs, the process for switching to the mode is executed. By the way, the special figure fixing process is not waited until the final stop display period elapses, but the special figure fixing process is ended when the period is not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure fixing process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the period during the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during the final stop display has elapsed, the numerical information of the Tokushu Tokuden counter is cleared to "0" in the situation where the transition to the open/close execution mode does not occur, and the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. Then, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric figure fixing process to the value corresponding to the special electric power start processing.

If the value of the special figure special power counter is "3", the process jumps to the special power start process of step S1009. In the special power start process, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. As a result, the opening effect is started in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special electric power starting process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, the special electric power start processing is ended instead of waiting in the special electric power start processing. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special electric power start processing is activated each time the special figure special electric power control processing is activated until the opening period elapses. Further, when the opening period has elapsed, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special-character special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the value corresponding to the special electric power open processing. ..

If the value of the special map special electric power counter is "4", the process jumps to the special electric power open process in step S1010. In the processing during the opening of the special electric power, while starting one round game, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special electric prize winning device 35 is opened. When the ending condition of the round game is not satisfied, the special electric power releasing process is not waited, but the special electric power releasing process is ended after executing the process for monitoring the end condition being satisfied. When the above end condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric power open during processing to the special electric close during processing. Update.

When the value of the special map special power counter is "5", the process jumps to the special power closing process in step S1011. In the special electric power closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 35 is closed. Also, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not elapsed, the special electric train closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric close process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special electric power closing control process is activated every time the special figure special electric power control process is activated until the period elapses. Also, when the interval period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is decremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power closing processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing. To do. On the other hand, in the special electric closing processing for the last round game, after executing the processing to end the round game of 1, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special electric closing processing. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special telephone end processing.

If the value of the special map special electric power counter is "6", the process jumps to the special electric power end processing of step S1012. In the special power termination processing, an ending command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. As a result, the ending effect is started in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special electric power termination processing, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the open/close execution mode has elapsed. When the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power ending processing is ended instead of waiting in the special electric power ending processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special electric power ending process is activated every time the special figure special electric power control process is activated until the ending period elapses. Also, when the ending period has elapsed, after the game state transition processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric ending processing. Update to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

In the gaming state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low-probability correspondence result, the win/loss lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. A process for setting the game state to the state is executed. If the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the first high-accuracy correspondence result, the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. The process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed. If the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the second high-accuracy correspondence result, the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. The process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start processing (step S1006).

In the special figure variation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the hold information is stored in any of the first special figure hold area 133 and the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1101: YES). (Step S1102). In the data setting process, when the holding information is stored in the second special drawing holding area 134, the second special drawing holding is performed regardless of whether the holding information is stored in the first special drawing holding area 133. The hold information stored in the first area 134a of the area 134 is moved to the special drawing execution area 135. Then, a process of shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure reservation area 134 is executed. In this data shift processing, the data in the first area 134a is cleared, and the second area 134b→the first area 134a, the third area 134c→the second area 134b, the fourth area 134d→the third area 134c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. In addition, in the data setting process, when the holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the holding information is stored in the first special drawing holding area 133, the first special drawing holding area The hold information stored in the first area 133a of 133 is moved to the execution area 135 for special drawings. After that, a process of shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure reservation area 133 is executed. In this data shift process, the data in the first area 133a is cleared, and the second area 133b→the first area 133a, the third area 133c→the second area 133b, the fourth area 133d→the third area 133c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. When the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area 133 and the second special figure reservation area 134 by executing the data setting process as described above, the second special figure winning device 34 The holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 corresponding to is prioritized as the start target of the game.

After that, the hit determination processing is executed (step S1103). In the win/loss determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the case of the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode win/fail table provided in the ROM 113 is referred to, and information for win/fail determination among the information stored in the special figure execution area 135, that is, the random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from is consistent with the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 135 for special figures is low by referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode provided in the ROM 113. It is judged whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information for probability.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S1104). If it is the jackpot winning result (step S1104: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S1105). In the distribution determination process, when the current game time is triggered by the reservation information stored in the first special map reservation area 133, the distribution table for the first special map (FIG. 14A) is referred to. Then, which jackpot result the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the information stored in the execution area 135 for special figures corresponds to is determined. On the other hand, in the distribution determination process, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special map reservation area 134, the distribution table for the second special map (FIG. 14B) is used. By referring to this, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 of the information stored in the special figure execution area 135 corresponds to.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1106). Specifically, the information about the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portions 45a and 45b, which are the variable display targets in the current game, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the jackpot result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. In the big hit result stop result table, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display portions 45a and 45b is set differently for each kind of big hit result.

After that, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S1107). Specifically, the RAM 114 is provided with a flag corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, and in step S1107, among the flags corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result of step S1105. Set "1" to the flag.

On the other hand, when it is not the jackpot winning result (step S1104: NO), the stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed (step S1108). Specifically, the information about the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, which are the variable display targets in the current game, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the disengagement result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After the processing of either step S1107 or step S1108 is executed, display continuation period acquisition processing is executed (step S1109). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current fluctuation start correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, if any of the jackpot results is obtained and the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 135 for special figures is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach display is generated. judge. When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113 is referred to, and the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the present variation type counter CS is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 113 is referred to and the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. To do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table is different from the display continuation period that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display continuation period table.

After that, the information on the display continuation period acquired in step S1109 is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1110). The value set in the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer updating process (FIG. 18) is executed.

After that, the variation command and the type command are set as transmission targets to the voice emission control device 121 (step S1111). The variation command includes information on the display continuation period. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table. Even if the use command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the sound emission control device 121 can specify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the display continuation period. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. By transmitting the variation command and the type command to the sound emission control device 121, the effect for game play is started on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. This game-use effect is executed over the display continuation period acquired in step S1109.

After that, the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display portions 45a and 45b which are the variable display targets of the current game is started (step S1112). In this case, when the game number of this time is triggered by the hold information of the first special map holding area 133, the variable display of the pattern on the first special map display portion 45a is started, and the game number of this time is the second special map. When the holding information in the holding area 134 is used as a trigger, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display portion 45b is started. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special power counter (step S1113). As a result, the process to be executed in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26) becomes the special figure changing process (step S1007).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Not only is the payout of the game balls performed by the game balls entering the branch winning device 37, but the entered game balls are downstream of the first lead-out region 65c of the branch prize device 37 and the second lead-out region. By flowing into any of the 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game balls is given. As a result, a plurality of benefits are given by the game balls entering the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game balls enter the branch winning device 37. Become. In this case, the branch winning device 37 detects the branch winning on the upstream side of the switching piece 67 that guides the game ball flowing down the branch passage 65 to either the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or the second derivation region 65d. The sensor 66a is provided, and when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the payout of the game ball is executed, and further, the first derivation region 65c or the second derivation on the downstream side of the switching piece 67. When a game ball flows into the area 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game ball is given. Thereby, even if the passage length dimension of the passage region downstream of the first lead-out region 65c or the passage region leading to the second lead-out region 65d is increased, the payout of the game ball with respect to the fact that the game ball has entered the branch winning device 37 is achieved. It becomes possible to do it early. Therefore, regarding the passage structure of the passage area continuing to the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d, while allowing the payout of the game ball for the entry of the game ball into the branch winning device 37 to be performed early. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design.

When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c, the first special figure winning device 33 that causes the acquisition of the hold information that is the execution target of the win/loss determination process is generated. When the game balls that enter the branch winning device 37 enter the second derivation region 65d, the second special prize winning device 34 that triggers the acquisition of the pending information that is the target of execution of the win/loss determination process. Will be accepted. Then, the second special character is generated as compared with the case where the winning/discarding determination processing is executed for the holding information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first holding information) acquired when the game ball enters the first special figure winning combination device 33. In the configuration, it is advantageous for the player to execute the winning/discarding determination process for the hold information (hereinafter also referred to as the second hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the winning device 34. is there. As a result, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 will be guided to the second lead-out area 65d, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first high probability state, the game balls that have entered the branch winning device 37 surely flow into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c, while in the second high probability state, the game balls that have entered the branch winning device 37. Reliably flows into the second lead-out area 65d. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game balls easily flow into the first lead-out area 65c and a state in which the game balls easily flow into the second lead-out area 65d.

In addition, when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c, the first special figure winning a prize device 33, which is a trigger for the acquisition of the first hold information, is in a receiving state, and the game ball is in the second derivation region 65d. In the case of inflow, the second special figure winning combination device 34, which is a trigger for the acquisition of the second hold information, is in the accepting state. Then, as described above, it is more advantageous for the player when the second hold information is the target of the hit determination processing than when the first hold information is the target of the hit determination processing. Therefore, the player not only expects to be in one of the high probability states, but also expects to be in the second high probability state rather than the first high probability state. As a result, the player's expectation can be made gradual, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the configuration in which the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, the game balls are supplied to positions on the upstream side of the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning apparatus 37 in the right side area PA3. There is provided a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72 that sequentially change the distribution direction when triggered. The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided on the upstream side of the second distribution mechanism 72, and the game balls distributed when the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the predetermined distribution direction are the second distribution mechanism 72. Is supplied to. Then, when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the first distribution state, the game is directed toward the through winning part 36. When the ball is supplied and the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the second distribution state, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is directed toward the branch entrance 61. Game balls are supplied. As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, it becomes possible to supply the game balls toward the through winning portion 36 and at the branch entrance 61. It becomes possible to supply the game balls toward. Further, by appropriately designing the configurations of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the frequency with which the game balls are supplied to the through winning part 36 and the game balls are supplied to the branch entrance 61. The frequency and the frequency can be set as desired by the designer. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the branch entrance 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through winning part 36, and the game ball entered the through winning part 36. Based on this, when the branch winning device 37 is opened, it is possible to reliably supply the game ball to the branch winning device 37 in the open state.

When nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round. As a result, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the game balls can be repeatedly distributed in a fixed manner.

Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 can enter the through winning part 36 and the branch winning device 37. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 to a desired frequency.

The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the three game balls are distributed toward the through winning part 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are directed toward the branch entrance 61. It is distributed. As a result, it is possible to secure a period from the game ball entering the through winning portion 36 to the supply of the game ball to the branch winning device 37. Therefore, when the branch prize device 37 is opened based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through prize portion 36, the game ball is surely supplied to the branch prize device 37 in the open state. In such a case, it is possible to secure a period until the branch winning device 37 is opened when the game ball enters the through winning portion 36.

The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 have the distribution directions before the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36 from the distribution state of the game balls to the branch winning device 37. The game balls are distributed in different distribution directions. As a result, by utilizing the period in which the game balls are distributed to the side different from the through winning part 36 and the branch winning device 37, the game balls are distributed to the branch winning device 37 after the game balls have entered the through winning part 36. It is possible to secure a certain long period until the supply of the.

Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the through winning portion 36, the variable display of the pattern is executed on the universal figure display portion 46, and when the variable display of the pattern is finished, the branch winning device 37 is opened. In the configuration, as described above, a certain period of time from the game ball entering the through winning part 36 until the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 is secured to the through winning part 36. In the case where the game ball is surely supplied to the branch winning device 37 in the open state when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, the branch winning device 37 It is possible to secure a period in which the variable display of the picture is executed on the general-purpose display unit 46 before the state is opened.

In the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, after the game ball is supplied to the through winning portion 36, the branch prize device The variable display of the pattern is displayed on the universal figure display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than the period required until the game balls are supplied to 37. Thus, in the first high probability state or the second high probability state, in the situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism. When the game balls distributed by 72 enter the through winning portion 36, the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to the branch prize device 37 next are branched entrance 61. It is possible to make the branch winning device 37 open before reaching.

On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the game ball entering the through winning part 36, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle. Even if it is done, at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is in a closed state. As a result, even if the branch winning device 37 can be opened in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the branch winning device 37. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantages of the first high probability state and the second high probability state.

In both the first high probability state and the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 cause the game balls distributed to the through winning part 36 to be 3 in the shortest firing cycle. While the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after entering the branch winning device 37 in the open state, the game balls that entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state are sure The opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is controlled so that the game balls that flow into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and enter the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state surely flow into the second derivation region 65d. The start timing and the passage switching timing by the switching piece 67 are set. As a result, while the operation modes of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are common, the game balls are supplied to the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c in the first high probability state, and the second high mechanism is provided. In the probability state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the second derivation area 65d. Also, while the number of game balls required from the supply of the game balls to the through winning part 36 to the supply of the game balls to the branch winning device 37 is set to a common number, the first derivation is performed in the first high probability state. It is possible to supply the game balls to the downstream side of the region 65c and to supply the game balls to the second derivation region 65d in the second high probability state.

In the configuration in which the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 are vertically juxtaposed in the right side area PA3, the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72 are the third When the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the distribution state, the game balls are supplied to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. Thereby, by performing a shooting operation so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls are supplied to the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 in a predetermined order. In addition to the above, it is possible to supply the game balls to the juxtaposed regions of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 in the predetermined order.

In particular, when the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are vertically arranged side by side, and the first special figure winning device 33 existing on the upstream side is in the non-accepting state, The game ball that has flowed into the installation area flows down toward the second special figure winning device 34. Thereby, even if it does not have a configuration in which the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34 are individually sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72, respectively. It is possible to supply the game balls to the receiving side of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

When the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are A special number of game balls or more are supplied to the juxtaposition area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 until the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36, and the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the receiving state. In the case of playing, a special number of game balls enter to return to the non-accepting state. Thereby, when the special figure winning device 33, 34 is in the accepting state, the game ball is supplied to the through winning part 36 after the special figure winning device 33, 34 is in the non-receiving state. It becomes possible, and in the situation where the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state, it is possible to allow the game balls to enter the through prize winning portion 36.

The branch winning device 37 is provided at a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. As a result, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the branch winning device 37 which is opened when the ball enters the through winning part 36. Therefore, the movement of the game balls distributed toward the branch winning device 37 by the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed even though the branch winning device 37 is opened due to the ball entering the through winning part 36. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the branch prize device 37 is closed before being thrown into the branch prize device 37 before being thrown.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the execution mode of the display control of the universal figure display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 are uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. However, in the present embodiment, the execution modes are not uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the universal figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment.

In steps S1201 to S1205, the same processes as steps S401 to S405 of the universal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment are executed.

In a situation where the winning control is not executed for both the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 (step S1201: NO), a case where a prize has been awarded to the through winning part 36 (Step S1202: YES), in the case of the first high probability state (Step S1203 and Step S1206: YES), the induction lottery table of the first high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (Step S1207), and the second high probability state. If it is (step S1203: YES, step S1206: NO), the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (step S1208). When the process of step S1207 or step S1208 is executed, the guidance lottery process is executed (step S1209).

In the present embodiment, the combination of the execution mode of the display control of the universal figure display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch-winning prize device 37 is the type that allows winning to the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the The guide lottery process determines which of the types that allows the two-trigger detection sensor 66c to win. In this case, the type of the guidance lottery table referred to in the guidance lottery process is different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. Specifically, in the first high-probability state induction lottery table, the probability that a combination of the execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as the first induction mode) that enables winning in the first trigger detection sensor 66b is selected. Is set to 80%, whereas the probability that the combination of the above-described execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as the second guidance mode) that enables winning in the second trigger detection sensor 66c is selected is 20%. It is set. Moreover, in the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state, the probability that the first guidance mode is selected is set to 20%, whereas the probability that the second guidance mode is selected is set to 80%. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity for the second special figure winning device 34 to enter the receiving state even in the first high-probability state, and the first special figure winning device 33 even in the second high-probability state. Will be given the opportunity to be accepted.

In addition, while the configuration in which the situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state and the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state as described above can occur in any of the high probability states, In the first high probability state, the first special figure winning device 33 has a higher probability of being in the receiving state than in the second special figure winning device 34, and in the second high probability state, the second special symbol winning device 33 has a higher probability of being received. There is a high probability that the winning device 34 will be in the receiving state. Furthermore, the probability that the first special figure winning device 33 will be in the receiving state is higher in the first high probability state than in the second high probability state, and the probability that the second special figure winning device 34 will be in the receiving state is the first. The second high probability state is higher than the first high probability state. This makes it possible to provide a difference between the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state with respect to the types of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in which the chance of winning a prize is likely to occur.

In the induction lottery process, numerical information of the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the RAM 114 is acquired. Then, the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter is collated with the induction lottery table of the first high probability state and the induction lottery table of the second high probability state which is currently read. Then, either the first induction mode or the second induction mode is selected.

When the first guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: YES), numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the variation display period for the first guidance is set in the universal figure variation measurement counter of the RAM 114. , "1" is set to the first guidance flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1211). As a result, the variable display period of the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 and the subsequent execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 are the modes in the case of the first high-probability state in the first embodiment. .. On the other hand, when the second guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: NO), numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the variation display period for the second guidance is set in the universal figure variation measurement counter of the RAM 114. At the same time, the first guidance flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1212). As a result, the variable display period of the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 and the subsequent execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 are the modes in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment. ..

After performing any one of the processes of step S1205, step S1211, and step S1212, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is started (step S1213). After that, 1 is added to the value of the universal figure/genuine counter (step S1214). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 19) is the universal figure changing process (step S306).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the processing for changing the universal figure in the present embodiment.

In steps S1301 to S1306, the same processes as steps S501 to S506 of the universal figure changing process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed.

When it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 (step S1301: YES), and when there is any high probability state (step S1303: YES), the first guidance flag of the RAM 114 is set to " By determining whether or not "1" is set, it is determined whether or not the first guidance mode is selected in the guidance lottery processing in the universal figure variation start processing (FIG. 27) (step S1307). When "1" is set to the first guidance flag (step S1307: YES), "1" is set to the normal power release time counter of the RAM 114, and the long power open period is set to the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. Numerical value information corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set (step S1308). As a result, the execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 becomes the mode in the case of the first high-probability state in the first embodiment. When "1" is not set in the first lead flag (step S1307: NO), "2" is set in the normal power release time counter of RAM 114 and the short power open period is set in the normal power release period counter of RAM 114. Numerical value information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set (step S1309). As a result, the execution mode of the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 becomes the mode in the case of the second high-probability state in the first embodiment.

In steps S1310 to S1314, the same processes as steps S510 to S514 of the universal figure changing process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, even in the first high probability state, the game balls that have entered the branch winning device 37 flow into the second derivation region 65d and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. It is possible that the game ball that entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state even in the second high probability state. Can happen. As a result, in both the first high probability state and the second high probability state, the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 flows into either the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or the second derivation region 65d. It is possible to make the player pay attention to what is to be done.

On the other hand, in the first high-probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 will flow into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c is higher than the probability that the gaming ball will flow into the second derivation region 65d. In the high probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 will flow into the second derivation region 65d is higher than the probability that the game ball will flow into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while ensuring that the second high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the first high-probability state.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the right side area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged right side area PA3 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the right area PA3 includes the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, the branch winning device 37, and the first sorting mechanism. 71, the 2nd distribution mechanism 72, the 1st guidance rail 99a, the 2nd guidance rail 99b, the 3rd guidance rail 99c, and the 4th guidance rail 99d are provided. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, although their relative positional relationship is the same as that of the first embodiment, the position where these are collectively arranged is slightly lower than that of the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric prize winning apparatus 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the special electric prize winning device 35 cannot be won, and in order to generate the prize to the special electric prize winning device 35, the right side area PA3 is generated. It is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball is fired toward.

The special electric prize winning device 35 includes a first special prize winning device 33, a second special prize winning device 34, a through winning part 36, a branch winning device 37, a first sorting mechanism 71, a second sorting mechanism 72, and each guide rail 99a. It exists on the upstream side of ~99d. As a result, the number of obstacles between the most upstream part of the game area PA and the special electric prize winning device 35 is reduced, and a prize is easily generated in the special electric prize winning device 35.

The special electric prize winning device 35 exists above the first distribution mechanism 71. However, between the special electric prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the special electric winning device 35 does not win the right side area PA3. In order that the game ball flowing down is surely supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71, a guiding portion 141 directed to the first sorting mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are the same as in the first embodiment, depending on the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. Side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the special area winning device 33, 34 is guided to either side of the juxtaposed region.

A special winning portion 142 is provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. The special winning portion 142 is opened vertically upward, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 142 are guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 142 is provided in the shape of a gate that penetrates in the vertical direction like the through winning portion 36, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 142 remain in the game area PA. It may be configured to continue the flow down. When one game ball is won in the special winning portion 142, nine game balls are paid out.

Between the special winning portion 142 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, a game ball that is distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 and is guided toward the branch entrance 61 by the third guide rail 99c. A special guide rail 143 is provided so as to surely guide the game balls that have not been won in the branch winning device 37 to the special winning portion 142. The special guide rail 143 is provided so as to vertically pass through the front of the transparent cover 69 of the branch winning device 37, but since it is formed transparent similarly to the transparent cover 69, the game inside the branch winning device 37 is played. The rolling mode of the ball can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the transparent cover 69 and the special guide rail 143.

Although the player has won the through winning part 36 in any of the high probability states, the first distributing mechanism 71 of the game balls which is supplied to the first distributing mechanism 71 three times after the game ball which has won the through winning part 36. Or, when the arrival timing to the branch entrance 61 is delayed than usual due to a delay in launch, when the game ball reaches the branch entrance 61, the branch prize device 37 has already been closed, and the branch prize device. There is a possibility that the winning of 37 will not occur. In this case, if an attempt is made to generate a prize in the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through winning part 36 again. However, in order to generate a prize in the through winning part 36 again, the first swing is performed. It is necessary to supply a plurality of game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that each distribution state of the distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36. As in the case of the first embodiment, nine game balls are required from the state where the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36 to the state where the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36 next time. Therefore, if the player fails to win the prize in the branch winning device 37 as described above, the nine game balls are wastefully consumed.

On the other hand, the game balls that have been guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 but have not won the branch winning device 37 are reliably guided to the special winning portion 142 by being guided by the special guiding rail 143. In the case of winning the prize in the special winning section 142, nine game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the player fails to win the prize in the branch winning apparatus 37 as described above, the payout of nine game balls will surely occur as compensation, and it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantage. Become.

In the configuration in which the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided at the boundary between the upper side area PA1 and the right side area PA3, the game balls that have been launched toward the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode but have not won the special electric prize winning apparatus 35 It is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. Since the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode in the opening/closing execution mode, in the opening/closing execution mode, even if a prize is awarded to the through prize winning portion 36, a prize is not substantially awarded to the branch winning device 37. In this case, since the special winning portion 142 is provided as described above, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode does not win the special electric winning device 35, the first distribution. One of the nine game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 is won in the special winning portion 142, and the payout of the nine game balls is executed. As a result, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode does not win the special electric prize winning device 35, the game ball can be compensated for that amount.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the right side area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged right side area PA3 in the present embodiment.

Similarly to the first embodiment, the right area PA3 is provided with the second special drawing winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, and the first sorting mechanism 71. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the branch winning device 37, and the second sorting mechanism 72 are not provided in the game area PA including the right area PA3. Since the first special diagram prize winning device 33 is not provided, the first special diagram provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA is the winning portion that causes the storage of the holding information in the first special figure holding area 133. Only the normal winning portion 32 is provided (see FIG. 3).

Further, in response to the absence of the branch winning device 37, the trigger for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-winning state to the receiving state is generated based on the winning of the through winning part 36. There is. In this case, the second special figure winning device 34 is not immediately switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state when a prize is awarded to the through prize winning part 36, but when a prize is awarded to the through prize winning part 36. The variable display of the picture is started on the public figure display unit 46, and when the variable display of the picture is finished, the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state.

By the way, in correspondence with the fact that the first special prize winning device 33 and the branch winning device 37 are not provided, in the present embodiment, only two types of support modes, a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, are set. Has been done. In the high-frequency support mode, when a prize is awarded to the through winning part 36, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display part 46 is performed for 0.8 seconds which is the variable display period for high support. When the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, the second special figure winning device 34 is surely brought into the accepting state. The acceptance state is that one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, and a period longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. The process ends when one of the conditions that the long acceptance period of 1.5 seconds, which has been set as, elapses, is satisfied.

In the low frequency support mode, when a prize is awarded to the through winning part 36, the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display part 46 is performed for 0.4 seconds which is the variable display period for low support. In addition, when a prize is awarded to the through winning portion 36, a winning lottery process is executed, and the winning prize is won with a predetermined probability of less than 100% in the winning lottery process. In the case of winning the winning, the second special figure winning device 34 becomes the receiving state at the timing when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, but the receiving state is more than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. When 0.1 seconds, which is the short acceptance period set as the short period, has elapsed, the second special figure winning combination device 34 ends even if no winning has occurred.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state is a high probability state that the win/loss lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode, and a win/loss lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. And a second low-probability state in which the win/loss lot mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In the distribution determination processing (step S1105) of the MPU 112, which is executed when the jackpot determination processing (step S1103) in the MPU 112 results in a big hit, in the case where the highly accurate correspondence result is obtained, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. When the high probability state is reached and the low probability response result is obtained, the first low probability state is entered after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high probability state continues until the next big hit result. The first low probability state ends when any of the 33 times, 55 times, 77 times and 110 times of game times corresponding to the end reference number of times is executed without generating a jackpot result, and the second low probability state Move to.

Whichever of the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 133 and the holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 is the target of the hit/absence determination process, the probability of a high-precision correspondence result is 80. It is constant in %. However, in the case of a highly accurate correspondence result triggered by the hold information stored in the second special diagram hold area 134, the number of round games is higher than the probability of the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 times. There is a higher probability that the open/close execution mode with 16 times occurs. On the other hand, in the case where the highly accurate correspondence result is triggered by the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the round is more than the probability that the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round games is 16 occurs occurs. The probability of occurrence of the open/close execution mode in which the number of games is eight is higher. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player when the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is the target of the hit/miss determination processing. By the way, in the data setting process (step S1102) of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 27), the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed, so that the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area When the reservation information is stored in both 134, the reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 is prioritized as the start target of the game time.

When the low probability response result is triggered by the holding information stored in the first special map holding area 133, the end reference number is 33 times after the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 times occurs. Transition to a certain first low probability state. On the other hand, in the case of a low probability correspondence result triggered by the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, after the opening and closing execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 occurs, the end reference number is It shifts to the first low probability state which is any of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times and 110 times. In this case, the selection rates of these end reference numbers are 25% and the same.

In the high probability state, when the holding information stored in the second special diagram holding area 134 is used as a trigger and any of the high-precision correspondence result and the low-precision correspondence result of eight rounds is obtained, which jackpot result is triggered in the opening/closing execution mode. The effect on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify. In addition, even after the open/close execution mode ends, if the low-probability response result is a trigger, it is difficult or difficult for the player to identify whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode until the high-frequency support mode ends. When the effect in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in a disabled state, and the high-precision correspondence result is used as an opportunity, the winning/winning lottery mode is high until 110 game times are exhausted. The effect on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether or not it is the probability mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the winning/winning lottery mode to be the high-probability mode while the high-frequency support mode continues during and after the opening/closing execution mode.

In the first embodiment, the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric prize winning apparatus 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the special electric prize winning device 35 cannot be won, and in order to generate the prize to the special electric prize winning device 35, the right side area PA3 is generated. It is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball is fired toward.

As in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71 uses the game balls supplied from above to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71, vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism. The configuration is such that it is distributed to either the right side of the 1 distribution mechanism 71, and each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → the vertically downward direction of the 1st distribution mechanism 71 → The distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed such that the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71→the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71→...

Here, how the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 32. 32A shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32B shows the period during which the game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. 32C shows a period during which the game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32D shows that the game balls are distributed toward the right side by the first distribution mechanism 71. Indicates the period.

When the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle by continuing the operation with the maximum operation amount of the firing operation device 28. To be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32(a), at constant intervals of t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t13, and t15. Thus, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71.

Of these, at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t7, and the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 are sorted toward the left side of the first sorting mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and the timing of t2 and the timing of t8. At the timings of t and t14, respectively, as shown in FIG. 32(b) and FIG. 32(c), the first distribution mechanism 71 moves the game ball from the state of distributing the game ball toward the left to the vertically downward direction. Change to the state of distribution.

At each of the timing of t3, the timing of t9, and the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and the timing of t4 and the timing of t10. 32(c) and 32(d), at the timings of t16 and t16, respectively, the first distribution mechanism 71 moves the game ball toward the right from the state where the game ball is distributed vertically downward. Change to the state of distribution.

At each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed to the right. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120°, and the timing of t6 and the timing of t12. 32(b) and 32(d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state of distributing game balls to the right to a state of distributing game balls to the left. To do.

As described above, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three, and one to three. It is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three.

The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided at a position downstream of the special electric prize winning device 35 in the right side area PA3 and at a position upstream of the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning part 36 in the right side area PA3. There is. Between the special electric prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 without winning the special electric prize winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. A guiding portion 151 directed to the first sorting mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In other words, in the right side area PA3, the game balls that will flow into the downstream side of the first distribution mechanism 71 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 before flowing into the downstream side.

The right area PA3 is provided with a first guide rail 152 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71. At the position where the game ball is guided by the first guide rail 152, neither the second special figure winning device 34 nor the through winning portion 36 is provided, and the game ball guided by the first guide rail 152 is the first. It will flow toward the lower area PA4 without winning any winning portion provided in the right side area PA3 including the 2 special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36.

The right area PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 153 for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 to a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special prize winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 153, and the game is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153. The ball surely wins the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the winning state when the through winning part 36 is won. The accepting state ends and returns to the non-accepting state when one of the conditions that one game ball is won in the second special figure winning combination device 34 and that the acceptance period elapses. When one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, as in the first embodiment, the payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134. Hold information is stored in.

On the other hand, if the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game balls that are distributed vertically below the first sorting mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153 are the second special maps. Without passing the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 of the second special figure winning device 34 is vertically penetrated. A third guide rail 154 is provided so as to guide the game ball, which vertically penetrates the passage portion 59a of the second special drawing winning device 34, vertically downward. Further, a special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 154.

The special winning portion 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 155 are guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 155 is provided in the shape of a gate that penetrates in the vertical direction like the through winning portion 36, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 155 remain in the game area PA. The flow may be continued. When one game ball is won in the special winning portion 155, three game balls are paid out. The game balls that are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and are guided by the second guide rail 153 but have not won the second special map winning device 34 are specially guided by the third guide rail 154. The winning portion 155 is surely won.

The right area PA3 is provided with a fourth guide rail 156 for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower right position of the first distribution mechanism 71. The through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 156, and the game ball that is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the fourth guide rail 156 is reliable. The player wins the through prize winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, the winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA and continues to flow down as it is in the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 flows down vertically, it is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 that are present on the left side of the through winning portion 36. There is no such thing.

In a configuration in which game balls are sequentially distributed in three directions by the first distribution mechanism 71, a second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. Since the through winning portion 36 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the order next to the gaming balls to be won in the through winning portion 36, It is not guided to the special figure winning device 34, and the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 are further guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the following order. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for the game ball to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning of the through winning portion 36 occurs. By utilizing this secured period, it becomes possible to perform variable display of the picture on the general figure display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set so that the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is completed and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special drawing winning device 34 is completed within the secured period. , Even when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game balls are guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning of the through winning part 36 occurs. Until then, the second special figure winning device 34 can be made to be in the receiving state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure winning device 34 is surely transferred to the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to make a prize.

The path length dimension of the guide path from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning portion 36 by the fourth guide rail 156 is determined by the second guide rail 153 from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the second special drawing winning device 34. It is set larger than the passage length dimension of the passage. When the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, one game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and then one game ball is first distributed. The period required for being sorted to the right by the sorting mechanism 71 is the same or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle.

In this configuration, since the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 156 is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the second guide rail 153, the first sorting mechanism 71 sorts the guide passage vertically downward. The time required for the game balls distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 to enter the through prize winning unit 36 is longer than the time required for the obtained game balls to win the second special map winning device 34. It becomes possible to secure it for a long time. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special prize winning device 34 in the receiving state to the occurrence of a prize to the through winning portion 36.

The through winning portion 36 invalidates the winning when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. Even if the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, the MPU 112 thereafter puts the second special figure winning device 34 into the non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute the process of No., and the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalidated until the process is completed. In this case, since the shortest period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special figure winning combination device 34 in the receiving state to the occurrence of a prize to the through winning portion 36 is secured long, By the time the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 reach the through winning portion 36 in the order following the game balls to be won in the 2 special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is set. The process of setting the non-acceptance state is surely completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning in the through winning part 36 is valid is surely completed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, only two types of support modes, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, are set. However, in the high-frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. After the variation display of the picture on the public figure display portion 46, the second special figure winning device 34 is surely brought into the accepting state. Here, the winning mode of the game ball in the high frequency support mode (that is, the high probability state) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 33(b) shows the timing for winning the through winning part 36, and FIG. 33(c) is the public figure display part. FIG. 33 shows the variable display period of the pattern in FIG. 46, FIG. 33(d) shows the period during which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state, and FIG. Show.

By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a situation where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be played in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right side area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right side area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the 1st distribution mechanism 71 as it did. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33A, at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, and the timing of t12, the first distribution mechanism 71 has the shortest firing cycle. Game balls are supplied to.

At the timing of t1, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the through winning part 36, so the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t1. As shown in FIG. 33B, the player wins the through winning part 36 at the timing of t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is started at the timing of t2. In the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display period of the picture of the general figure display unit 46 is constant at 0.8 seconds which is longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and shorter than twice the shortest firing cycle. There is.

After that, at the timing of t3, which is the situation in which the variable display of the picture is continued on the public figure display unit 46, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the left, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t3 is the second. The special figure winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 are provided in an area different from the area in which the through winning portion 36 is provided. Therefore, the game ball flows down toward the lower area PA4 as it is without winning any of the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning part 36, and the special winning part 155.

After that, at the timing of t4, the variable display of the picture on the public figure display portion 46 is finished as shown in FIG. Since it is the high frequency support mode, at the timing of t4 when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is finished, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state as shown in FIG. 33(d). This acceptance state is continued until one of the conditions that one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34 and that the long acceptance period elapses is satisfied.

After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning combination device 34, it is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t5. As shown in FIG. 33(e), the game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 at the timing of t6. After that, the processing for returning the second special prize winning device 34 to the non-accepting state by the MPU 112 is completed, so that the second special prize winning device 34 is not activated at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 33(d). Return to receiving state.

After that, at the timing of t8, which is the state where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33(a). At the timing of t8, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the through winning part 36, so the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8. As shown in FIG. 33(b), the player wins the through winning part 36 at the timing of t9. Then, if the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the same situation as the timing of t2 to the timing of t7 occurs at the timing of t9 to the timing of t14.

With the above-described configuration, in the high-frequency support mode, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are second after the game balls to be won in the through winning portion 36. Even if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the cycle of winning in the special figure winning device 34 is for every three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. appear. As a result, it is possible to efficiently generate a prize in the second special figure winning combination device 34 in the high frequency support mode.

Further, when one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, three game balls are paid out as in the first embodiment. As a result, in the high frequency support mode, in the configuration in which the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are certainly won to the second special figure winning device 34 at a ratio of one to three, the second special feature is adopted. When a prize is paid to the winning device 34, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can generate a prize in the second special figure winning combination device 34 while not substantially reducing the number of balls.

On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display period of the picture in the general figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.4 seconds. Further, even if the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the accepting state when the variable display of the picture on the public figure display portion 46 is finished, the acceptance continuation period of the accepting state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this configuration, even if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after two game balls won in the through winning portion 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34, the acceptance control of the second special drawing winning device 34 has already been completed, and the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-receiving state. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, even if the second special drawing winning device 34 can be in the accepting state, it is substantially impossible to win the second special drawing winning device 34.

Next, the effect of providing the special winning portion 155 will be described.

The first distribution mechanism of the game balls, which is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 two times after the game balls which have won the through winning part 36 in any of the high frequency support modes but have won the through winning part 36. When the arrival timing to 71 is delayed than usual due to a delay in launching, etc., when the game ball reaches the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is already in the non-accepting state. Therefore, there is a possibility that no prize will be paid to the second special figure winning device 34. In this case, if an attempt is made to generate a prize in the second special figure winning device 34, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through prize winning part 36 again, but in order to generate a prize in the through prize winning part 36 again, It is necessary to further supply the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36. Since three game balls are required until the game balls are distributed to the through prize winning unit 36 after the game balls are distributed to the through prize winning unit 36, the second game ball is used as described above. If the player fails to win the prize in the special figure winning device 34, the three game balls are wastefully consumed.

On the other hand, the game balls that have been guided toward the second special figure winning device 34 but have not won the second special figure winning device 34 are guided by the third guide rail 154 to thereby receive the special winning portion. If the player wins the prize 155 surely and further wins the special prize unit 155, three game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the player fails to win the prize for the second special prize winning device 34 as described above, the payout of the three game balls will surely occur as a compensation, so that the player's sense of disadvantage is suppressed. Is possible.

Further, in the configuration in which the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3, a game which is launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode but has not won the special electric prize winning device 35. The balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71. In the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode, even if the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the winning in the second special drawing winning device 34 does not substantially occur. .. In this case, since the special winning portion 155 is provided as described above, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode does not win the special electricity winning device 35, the first distribution is performed. One of the three game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the special winning portion 155, and the payout of the three game balls is executed. As a result, even if the game ball shot toward the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode does not win the special electric prize winning device 35, the game ball can be compensated for that amount.

Next, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the universal figure/universal communication control process in this embodiment. The general/universal/universal control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, the information on the universal figure/universal phone counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1401), and the universal figure/universal phone address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S1402). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the universal figure universal telephone counter is acquired from the universal figure universal telephone address table (step S1403).

The normal/universal figure electric power control process monitors presence/absence of a prize in the through/winning unit 36 and changes the normal/universal pattern to start the variable display of the pattern in the general/universal display unit 46 upon the winning in the through/winning unit 36. The start process (step S1405) and the normal figure changing process for updating the variable display of the picture on the normal figure display unit 46 and for starting the acceptance control of the second special symbol winning device 34 when the variable display period elapses. (Step S1406) and the normal electric power operation process (step S1407) for executing the acceptance control of the second special drawing winning device 34 are set. In such a processing configuration, the universal figure/universal phone counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the above-mentioned plural types of processes should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-described plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the universal figure counter. The general/universal/general-purpose counter will be triggered by the condition that the numerical information currently stored should be updated when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information has been completed, and the general/universal/universal counter in the next processing 1 is added or "0" is cleared according to the processing executed in the power control processing. Therefore, in the universal/universal communication control process at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute a process according to the numerical information set in the universal/universal communication system counter. It should be noted that "0" is set as an initial value of the universal figure/universal counter.

After executing the process of step S1403, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1403 is executed in step S1404. Specifically, if the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “0”, the process jumps to the universal figure variation start process in step S1405, and if the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “1”, the step is performed. If the value of the universal figure/universal phone counter is “2”, the process jumps to the general/universal figure changing process of S1406.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the universal figure fluctuation start process in this embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the through winning part 36 (step S1501). Here, the MPU 112 executes monitoring processing as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through winning portion 36 in the prize detection processing (step S209) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18). It is executed on condition that the value of the power counter is "0". Therefore, in the situation where the variable display of the picture is being executed in the public figure display unit 46 and the acceptance control of the second special figure winning combination device 34 is being executed, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated.

If a prize has been paid to the through winning part 36 (step S1501: YES), it is confirmed by checking whether or not "1" is set in the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the RAM 114. It is determined whether the frequency support mode is set (step S1502). When it is the low frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), the acceptance lottery process is executed (step S1503). In the acceptance lottery process, the current numerical value information of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is read into the execution area 136 for general purpose. Then, by referring to the acceptance lottery table read from the ROM 113, it is grasped whether or not the numerical information read out to the general-purpose execution area 136 is the numerical information corresponding to the acceptance win, and the grasped result is stored in the RAM 114. Remember. After that, the numerical information corresponding to 0.4 seconds as the variable display period for low support is set in the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1504). On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds as the variable display period for high support is set in the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 (step S1505). ). The value set in the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the universal figure variation measurement counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 identifies the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46.

After the processing of either step S1504 or step S1505 has been executed, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 is started (step S1506). In this case, the mode of the picture displayed on the universal figure display unit 46 is the same at the start timing of the variable display of the picture, regardless of which of the processing of step S1504 and step S1505 is executed. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 in the same manner in any of the situations, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load. It should be noted that, before the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 46 is started, it is assumed that the display of the pattern finally stopped and displayed in the previous variable display time of the pattern on the general figure display unit 46 is continued. Is becoming After that, 1 is added to the value of the Uzu-Uden counter (step S1507). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 34) is the universal figure changing process (step S1406).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the processing for changing the universal figure in the present embodiment.

In the universal figure fluctuation process, if the value of the universal figure fluctuation measurement counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S1601: NO), it means that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46. Therefore, the display content update process is executed (step S1602). In the update processing of the display content, the pattern displayed on the general figure display section 46 is updated to the next order of patterns, provided that it is the timing to update the display content of the general figure display section 46. In this case, the pattern update mode is constant irrespective of whether it is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state, and in the low-probability state, the pattern is irrelevant regardless of whether or not it is accepted in the acceptance lottery process. The update mode of is constant. This makes it possible to update the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display unit 46 in the same manner in any of the situations, thus reducing the processing load.

If it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), and if it is the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO), in step S1503 of the general figure variation start process (FIG. 35). In the acceptance lottery processing, it is determined whether or not the acceptance has been won (step S1604). If the acceptance has not been won (step S1604: NO), the value of the universal figure/universal counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1605). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 34) is the universal figure variation start process (step S1405).

In the low-frequency support mode (step S1603: NO) and when the acceptance is elected (step S1604: YES), the universal electric open period counter provided in the RAM 114 corresponds to the short acceptance period of 0.1 seconds. Numerical information to be set is set (step S1606). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), and in the high frequency support mode (step S1603: YES), the universal electricity release period counter of the RAM 114 is displayed. Numerical information corresponding to the long acceptance period of 1.5 seconds is set (step S1607). The normal electric open period counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining maximum period until the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the non-receiving state when the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the receiving state. Is. The value set in the normal power open period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the ordinary electric opening period counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is determined that it is the end timing of the present opening time in the second special figure winning combination device 34.

When either the process of step S1606 or step S1607 is executed, the acceptance start process of the second special figure winning combination device 34 is executed (step S1608). In the acceptance start process, output of a drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is started. As a result, the second special figure winning combination device 34 enters the receiving state. After that, 1 is added to the value of the general/universal/universal counter of the RAM 114 (step S1609). As a result, the execution target of the general/universal-university control process (FIG. 34) becomes the general-universal-operation-in-progress process (step S1407).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the process during the normal power operation in this embodiment.

By determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, it is determined whether or not a win has been generated in the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701). .. When a prize has not been generated in the second special prize winning device 34 (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the universal electric open period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, and the second special character is determined. It is determined whether or not the acceptance period of the figure winning device 34 has passed (step S1702).

If a prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701: YES), or if the acceptance period of the second special figure winning device 34 has elapsed (step S1702: YES), the second special feature The acceptance end process of the figure winning a prize device 34 is executed (step S1703). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is stopped. As a result, the second special figure winning combination device 34 enters the non-accepting state. After that, the value of the universal figure/genuine counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1704). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the universal figure/universal control process (FIG. 34) is the universal figure variation start process (step S1405).

FIG. 38(a) is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing executed by the MPU 112. The game state transition processing is executed by the special electric power ending processing of step S1012 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 26).

When the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate response result (step S1801: YES), "1" is set to the high probability flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1802), and the RAM 114 is also set. "1" is set to the first high-frequency support flag provided in (step S1803). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 112, and the first high-frequency support flag is a high-frequency support that continues until the support mode becomes the next big hit result. This is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify whether or not the mode is set. By setting "1" to both the high probability flag and the first high frequency support flag, the gaming state becomes the high probability state.

If the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low probability correspondence result (step S1801: NO), the high probability flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1804), and the result is provided in the RAM 114. "1" is set to the second high-frequency support flag (step S1805). The second high frequency support flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode that continues until the end reference number of game times are exhausted. By clearing the value of the high probability flag from "0" and setting the second high frequency support flag to "1", the gaming state becomes the first low probability state. Then, the high-frequency execution counter is set (step S1806). In the set process, a value corresponding to the type of the low-probability correspondence result that triggered the present open/close execution mode out of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times is stored in the high-frequency execution counter provided in the RAM 114. set. The high-frequency execution counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of games for which the high-frequency support mode will continue. The value set in the high-frequency execution counter is decremented by 1 each time the game is executed, and when the value of the high-frequency execution counter becomes "0", the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Changes to.

When the process of step S1803 or step S1806 is executed, the ending command transmission process is executed (step S1807). In the ending command transmission process, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low probability correspondence result, the ending command in which the information of the termination reference number of the high frequency support mode is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. Then, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate correspondence result, an ending command in which information corresponding thereto is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121.

FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the display continuation period acquisition processing executed by the MPU 112. The display continuation period acquisition process is executed in step S1109 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 27).

In the case where the current game time is the high frequency support mode, the hold information in the second special figure reservation area 134 is the start target of the game time, and the result of the hit/miss determination processing is not the jackpot result (step S1901 and step S1902: (YES, step S1903: NO), and it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 (step S1904). When the holding information is stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 (step S1904: YES), the second special drawing holding area 134 is stored in the situation where another holding information is stored in the second special drawing holding area 134. It means that the current game time is started by using the hold information stored in. In this case, the information corresponding to the fixed short period of 1.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as the information of the display continuation period of this game time, and the read fixed short-term information is set in the special map special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. Yes (step S1905). As a result, in this game time, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 45b is performed for a fixed short period of time, and the effect for the game time is displayed on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the pattern display device 41. Is carried out over a fixed short period.

On the other hand, when the holding information is not stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 (step S1904: NO), the second special drawing holding is performed in a situation where another holding information is not stored in the second special drawing holding area 134. This means that the current game time is started with the holding information stored in the area 134 as a trigger. In this case, the information corresponding to the fixed long period of 7.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as the information of the display continuation period of this game time, and the read fixed long period information is set in the special map special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. Yes (step S1906). As a result, in the current game time, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 45b is performed for a fixed long period, and the effect for the game time is displayed on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the pattern display device 41. Is performed over a fixed period of time.

In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, when the game times are executed triggered by the hold information stored in the second special diagram reservation area 134, and the result of the hit/miss determination processing of the game times is not the jackpot result, The display continuation period of the game time is a fixed short period if another holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, and another holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134. If there is a fixed long term. Thereby, in the high-frequency support mode, it becomes possible to simplify the execution mode of each game time in the situation in which the game information resulting from the deviation is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. ..

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, if the game balls are supplied toward the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), a predetermined number of two or more. A prize is given to the second special figure winning device 34 at a rate of one (specifically, three). In this case, when the game time which is the variable display target of the second special figure display portion 45b is executed in the situation where the other special reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the display continuation period is It is a fixed short period that is a period shorter than “shortest firing period×predetermined number”. As a result, in a case where the game information as a result of disengagement continues in a situation where the holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the maximum holding number of holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. In this state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new prize is awarded to the second special figure prize winning device 34. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the pending information is not acquired despite the winning of the second special figure winning device 34.

In addition, when the game time in which the second special figure display unit 45b is in the variable display mode is executed in a situation where another reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the display continuation period is "shortest. Firing period×predetermined number×maximum holding number in second special figure holding area 134” and less than “shortest firing cycle×predetermined number×(maximum holding number in second special figure holding area +1)” Fixed long term. As a result, when the game result of the deviation result is executed in a situation where the reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the maximum reservation is made in the second special figure reservation area 134 during the execution of the game time. The number of pieces of reservation information will be stored, and in the state where the maximum reservation number of pieces of reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 during the execution of the game, It is possible to prevent a situation in which a new winning is generated.

In the display continuation period acquisition process, when the low frequency support mode is selected (step S1901: NO), when the first special figure display unit 45a is a game time that is a variable display target (step S1902: NO), or this time. When the game time is a game time corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1903: YES), a corresponding display continuation period setting process is executed (step S1907). In the setting process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current fluctuation start correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, if any of the jackpot results is obtained and the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 135 for special figures is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach display is generated. judge. When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113 is referred to, and the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the present variation type counter CS is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 113 is referred to and the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. To do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table is different from the display continuation period that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display continuation period table. After that, the acquired information on the display continuation period is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the RAM 114. As a result, in a situation other than the situation in which the game information resulting from the deviation is triggered by the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 in the high-frequency support mode, the execution modes of the game times can be diversified. It will be possible.

Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. The effect determination process is repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

When the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121 receives the ending command from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2001: YES), the high-frequency support mode after the end of the current open/close execution mode continues from the ending command. The number of different game times is grasped (step S2002). As described above, when the first low-probability state is reached after the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, or 110 times. If so, the high-frequency support mode will continue indefinitely until the next big hit result occurs. Therefore, in step S2002, which one of these five types of continuation times is detected from the ending command, the information on the grasped continuation times is provided in the RAM 125 of the sound emission control device 121 as information on the actual continuation times. Set to the actual continuation counter.

Thereafter, the information on the number of initial display continuations is read from the ROM 124 of the sound emission control device 121, and the information on the number of initial display continuations is set in the display counter provided in the RAM 125 (step S2003). The on-display counter is a counter for the MPU 123 to specify the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41. The initial display continuation number is set to 11 times, which is smaller than any actual continuation number that can be grasped in step S2002. Then, the undisplayed continuation number is calculated by subtracting the initial display continuation number read out in step S2003 from the actual continuation number acquired in step S2002, and the calculated undisplayed continuation number is stored in the RAM 125 and is not displayed. The continuation number counter is set (step S2004). In addition, when the actual number of continuations is infinite, information corresponding to infinity is set in the undisplayed continuation number counter.

After that, the initial display command is transmitted to the display control device 126 (step S2005). In the initial display command, information on the number of times of initial display continuation read in step S2003 is set. When the display control device 126 receives the initial display command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to start moving image display corresponding to the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, and as an image of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode. An image of the initial display continuation number is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The image of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41 even in the situation where the effect for game play is executed after the ending period ends. In addition, each time the effect for game play is started, the image is updated so that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is subtracted by 1, and the number of continuations is described later. When the value addition condition is satisfied, the image is updated so that the value corresponding to the satisfaction of the addition condition is added. The image display of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 ends when the high frequency support mode ends and becomes the low frequency support mode, or when a jackpot result occurs and the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the effect determination process, when the variation command and the type command are received from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 as the command for starting the game time (step S2006: YES), the process for starting the game time is executed (step S2007). Further, in the effect determination process, other processes are executed (step S2008). In the other processing, when a command other than the ending command and the command for starting the game number is received, a process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the game number starting process executed in step S2007 of the effect determination process (FIG. 39).

First, since the case where the command for starting the game time is received means that a new game time is started, the value of the on-display counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by 1 (step S2101). If the value of the displayed counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Further, even when the information of the displayed counter is infinitely corresponding information, the state is maintained. When the information of the displaying counter is information corresponding to infinity, the high frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result as an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode continues in the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. This corresponds to the situation in which the image indicating that the action is being performed is displayed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-display continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the displaying counter of the RAM 125 is "0" (step S2102). When the value of the non-display continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the displaying counter of the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102: YES), the high frequency support mode continues despite the situation. This means that the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 is zero. Therefore, by setting "1" to the addition display flag provided in the RAM 125, the MPU 123 can specify that it is necessary to perform the addition display of the number of times of continuation (step S2103).

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, or if the processing of step S2103 is executed, it is determined whether the information of the display continuation period set in the variation command is a fixed long period (step S2104). If it is a fixed long period (step S2104: YES), the condition that the addition display flag is set to "1" (step S2105: YES) is an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41. The process for adding is executed.

Specifically, first, the process of grasping the number of times of continuous addition display is executed (step S2106). In the process of recognizing the addition display continuation number, if the value of the non-display continuation number is less than 11, the undisplayed continuation number is grasped as the addition display continuation number. Further, when the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is not infinite and is 11 or more, 11 times is grasped as the additional display continuation number. Further, if the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is infinite, if the number of game times executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is less than 100, 11 times is grasped as the additional display continuation number, and if it is 100 times or more. For example, the information corresponding to infinity is grasped as the number of additional display continuations. Then, the information on the grasped additional display continuation number is set in the in-display counter of the RAM 125 (step S2107), and the value of the undisplayed continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is subtracted by the value of the additional display continuation number (step S2108). In addition, when the information of the non-display continuation number counter is information corresponding to infinity, the information corresponding to the infinity is kept set regardless of the information of the additional display continuation number.

After that, the addition display corresponding process is executed (step S2109). In the addition display support process, a table for effect control corresponding to execution of addition display for a fixed period is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, effects corresponding to the execution of the addition display in the game time in the fixed long period are executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b. To be done. In addition, a command in which information indicating that the current game time corresponds to the out-of-game result for a fixed period of time and information on the number of additional display continuations is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the contents designated by the command. Thereby, the effect for game use corresponding to the disengagement result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period, and is displayed as an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued on the symbol display device 41. The value becomes the value of the number of times this addition display is continued. In this case, if the addition display continuation count is information corresponding to infinity, as the image of the continuation count of the high frequency support mode, an image corresponding to the infinity indicating that the high frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result. Is displayed.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variation command is a fixed long period and "1" is not set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125 (step S2104: YES, step S2105: NO), The highlighting correspondence process is executed (step S2110). In the highlighting support processing, the effect corresponding to the execution of the highlighting for emphasizing that the current state is the high frequency support mode and highlighting the image displayed as the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 is performed. The control table is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the table for effect control, an effect corresponding to the execution of the highlighting is executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in the game time for a fixed long period. To be done. In addition, for a fixed period of time, a command in which information indicating that the current game time corresponds to the miss result and the highlighted execution information is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the contents designated by the command. Thereby, the effect for game use corresponding to the disengagement result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period of time, and it is emphasized that the current state is the high frequency support mode and high on the symbol display device 41. The effect for emphasizing the image displayed as the number of times the frequency support mode is continued is executed by the symbol display device 41.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variation command is the information of the fixed short period (step S2111: YES), the short period corresponding process is executed (step S2112). In the short-term support process, the effect control table corresponding to the fixed short-term is read from the ROM 124. There is only one type of effect control table stored in the ROM 124 in advance for a fixed short period. The display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b are controlled according to the effect control table, so that the game light emitting effect corresponding to the fixed short period is executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b.

In the short-term support process, a short-term support command is transmitted to the display control device 126. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term corresponding command, the display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the corresponding effect for game play is executed in a fixed short period. In the game diversion for a fixed short period, high-speed fluctuation of symbols is started in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the final stop period (0.2 seconds) is subtracted from the fixed short period (1.2 seconds). The variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time in a state where the combination of symbols corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed at the timing when a certain period has elapsed. Then, the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed is maintained for the final stop period. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate by the display content of the symbol display device 41 that the game time this time is out of the result even if the effect for the game time is finished in a fixed short period. It should be noted that the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the game use rendition corresponding to the fixed short period may be always the same, or may be changed by being determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, in the short-term support process, when "1" is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the undisplayed continuous number counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by 1. Then, the information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 should be incremented by 1 is set in the short-term corresponding command. When the display control device 126 receives the command corresponding to the short period, not only the effect for game play as described above is executed, but also as an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41. Add 1 to the displayed value.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variation command is neither the fixed long period nor the fixed short period (step S2104 and step S2111: NO), the command transmission process is executed (step S2113). In the command transmitting process, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice display and the execution content is executed based on the contents of the changing command and the type command. Then, the effect control table corresponding to the display duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, the effect for this game play is executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b. In addition, a non-fixed command in which information corresponding to the display duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the contents designated by the non-fixed command. As a result, the effect for game play this time is executed by the symbol display device 41.

Further, in the command transmitting process, when "1" is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the non-display continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by 1. Then, information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 should be incremented by 1 is set in the non-fixed command. When the display control device 126 receives the non-fixed command, not only the effect for game play as described above is executed, but also displayed as an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41. The specified value is incremented by 1.

Next, regarding the flow of the game in the case where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode and the game times corresponding to the disengagement result continue, Description will be given with reference to the time chart. FIG. 41(a) shows the winning timing to the second special drawing winning device 34, and FIG. 41(b) shows how the number of pieces of holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 increases or decreases. 41(c) shows an execution period of the game reproductive effect.

The opening/closing execution mode ends at the timing of t1 and the game use effect can be started in the high-frequency support mode. In this case, since the holding information of the upper limit holding number is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 before the opening/closing execution mode is started, at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 41(b). In the second special figure reservation area 134, four pieces of reservation information, which is the upper limit reservation number, are stored. Therefore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the effect for game play is started with the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as a trigger. Since the game time is a game time that corresponds to the deviation result that is started when the holding information is separately stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the display duration of the game time is a fixed short period 1 .2 seconds.

Here, at the timing of t1, the firing of the game ball toward the right side area PA3 is started with the shortest firing cycle. As described above, when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, the ratio is one for every predetermined number of two or more (specifically, three). Then, among the predetermined number of game balls, the game balls having the same firing order win the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41A, timing t3, timing t5, timing t8, timing t10, timing t13, timing t15, timing t18, timing t19, timing t20, timing t21. Winnings to the second special figure winning device 34 occur regularly at the timing, the timing of t23, and the timing of t26. In this case, the cycle in which a prize is awarded to the second special figure winning combination device 34 is "shortest firing cycle×predetermined number". Specifically, it is 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, in the game times in which the second special figure display unit 45b is subject to variable display in the situation where other special reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, as already described. The display duration is 1.2 seconds, which is a fixed short period that is shorter than the “shortest firing period×predetermined number”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41C, the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t14, and the timing of t16. As described above, the game times whose display continuation period is a fixed short period are regularly executed. And, because this fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which a prize is awarded to the second special prize winning device 34, at the timing of t17, which is the timing at which 10 game times are executed from the timing of t1, FIG. As shown in (b) and FIG. 41(c), in the situation where only one piece of reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, it is the timing to start the game times triggered by the reservation information. In this case, since the second special figure display portion 45b is subject to change start in the situation where another holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 in the game time, the display continuation period is a fixed long period. ..

For a fixed long time, in the high-frequency support mode, in a situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the second special feature is provided at a ratio of one to a predetermined number (specifically, three). In the configuration in which a prize is awarded to the figure winning a prize device 34, "shortest firing period×predetermined number×maximum reserved number of the second special figure reservation area 134" and more than "shortest firing period×predetermined number×(second It is set to 7.2 seconds, which is less than the maximum reserved number of special figure reserved area 134+1)". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(c), the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, and the timing of t21, which are the situations in which the game times are executed for a fixed long time, are respectively performed. 2 When special prize winning device 34 wins, the reserved information is stored in second special figure reservation area 134, and at the timing of t21, the maximum reserved number of pieces of reserved information is stored in second special figure reservation area 134. It becomes a state.

Here, if the addition display condition is satisfied in the game time that is a fixed long time, the value displayed as the image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41 is set to "11". To be done. In this case, if the first low-probability state is reached after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is any of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times, and all are “11”. It is a multiple. Further, after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the value initially displayed as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 is “11”, and is displayed each time the game time is newly started. Since the existing value is decremented by 1, the displayed value becomes "0" when the 11th game time is started. In addition, when the game operation is continued in the mode in which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, and each game time is out of alignment, the game operation is performed 10 times each time. The game times for a fixed long period are executed. Then, if the display in the image of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode is "0" in the game time that is a fixed long time, if the high frequency support mode continues after that, it is displayed as that image. The value is basically “11”. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display in the image of the number of times the high-frequency support mode is continued is added every time the game time that is the fixed long period is executed, and the period is longer than the fixed short period. It is possible to execute the effect of performing the addition display as the effect for continuing the game use.

After that, after the timing of t22, the game time is started in which the second special figure display portion 45b is subject to the fluctuation start in a state where one piece of reserved information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. Up to now, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the game time is repeatedly executed in a fixed short period (timing t22, timing t24, timing t25, and timing t27). Even in this situation, as described above, the fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which the prize is given to the second special figure prize winning device 34, so that it is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as shown in FIG. 41(b). The number of pending information is gradually decreasing. Then, from the timing of t22, at the timing when the game times are executed 11 times in a fixed short period, just one piece of the holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, similarly to the timing of t17. In the situation, it becomes the timing to start the game times triggered by the holding information, and the game times for a fixed long period will be started.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In a configuration in which the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning part 36 are provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, the position on the upstream side of the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning part 36 in the right side area PA3. In addition, a first distribution mechanism 71 that sequentially changes the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied is provided. Then, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the first distribution state, the game ball is supplied toward the through winning part 36, When the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the situation where the distribution mechanism 71 is in the second distribution state, the game ball is supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is possible to supply the game balls toward the through winning portion 36, and the second special figure. It becomes possible to supply game balls toward the winning device 34. In addition, by appropriately designing the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, the frequency with which the game balls are supplied to the through winning portion 36 and the frequency with which the game balls are supplied to the second special prize winning device 34 are set. It is possible to set the frequency as desired by the designer. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 after a predetermined period has passed since the game balls were supplied to the through winning part 36, and the game balls are supplied to the through winning part 36. When the second special figure winning device 34 is put into the receiving state based on the fact that the player has entered the game, the game balls are surely supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state. Is possible.

When three game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. As a result, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, whereby the game balls can be repeatedly distributed in a fixed manner.

Only the game balls sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 can enter the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36. As a result, it becomes easy to design the frequency of entering the second special symbol winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 to a desired frequency.

The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the two game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the second special figure winning device 34. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure a period from the game ball entering the through winning portion 36 to the supply of the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state based on the game ball entering the through winning part 36, the game ball is in the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period until the second special figure winning device 34 enters the receiving state, triggered by the game ball entering the through winning portion 36.

The first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution direction different from the distribution direction before the game balls are distributed to the second special prize winning device 34 from the state where the game balls are distributed to the through winning part 36. The game balls are distributed to the state. As a result, the second special figure is entered after the game ball has entered the through winning section 36 by utilizing the period in which the game ball is distributed to the side different from the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning section 36. It is possible to secure a somewhat long period until the game balls are supplied to the winning device 34.

The variation display of the picture is executed in the universal figure display section 46 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning section 36, and when the variation display of the picture is finished, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. Become. In the configuration, as described above, the period from the game ball entering the through winning part 36 to the supply of the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is secured to some extent, so that the through winning part 36 When the second special figure winning device 34 is put into the receiving state based on the fact that the game ball is entered in, the game ball is surely supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state. In such a case, it is possible to secure a period in which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the universal figure display unit 46 before the second special figure winning combination device 34 enters the accepting state.

In the high-frequency support mode, when the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, the game balls are supplied to the through winning portion 36 and then the game balls are supplied to the second special prize winning device 34. The variable display of the pattern is displayed on the universal figure display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than the period required for the supply of the. As a result, in the high-frequency support mode, in a situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 enter the through winning part 36. In the case of a sphere, the second special map winning device 34 is received before the game ball, which is distributed to the second special map winning device 34 by the first sorting mechanism 71, reaches the second special map winning device 34. It becomes possible to be in a state.

On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the second special prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning part 36, the first distribution mechanism 71 plays the game in the shortest firing cycle. Even if the balls are supplied, at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the second special prize winning device 34, the acceptance control of the second special prize winning device 34 has already been completed, and the second special prize winning device 34 is not accepted. It is in a state. As a result, in the low probability state, even if the second special drawing winning device 34 can be in the accepting state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second special drawing winning device 34. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode.

When the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the second special drawing winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 after one game ball is supplied to the second special drawing winning device 34. Is in a state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36, and the second special figure winning device 34 is returned to the non-accepting state by entering one game ball in the accepting state. As a result, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the through winning part 36 after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. It becomes possible, and in the situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the through winning part 36. In addition, it is possible to prevent useless game balls from being supplied to the through winning portion 36 after the game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34.

The passage length dimension of the fourth guide rail 156 that guides the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning part 36 is such that the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 are the second special figure winning device. It is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the second guide rail 153 that guides to 34. As a result, the gaming balls sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 have a period of time required for the gaming balls sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 to reach a position where they can enter the through winning portion 36. It is possible to make the period longer than the time required to reach the position where the 2 special figure winning device 34 can enter the ball. Therefore, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the through winning part is performed after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state based on the ball entering the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to supply a game ball to 36, and it is possible to generate a ball to the through winning part 36 in a situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects by only adjusting the passage length dimensions of the second guide rail 153 and the fourth guide rail 156.

The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first sorting mechanism 71. As a result, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the second special figure winning combination device 34 which is in the receiving state triggered by the ball entering the through winning part 36. Therefore, despite the fact that the second special prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state triggered by the ball entering the through winning portion 36, the second special prize winning device 34 is distributed to the second special prize winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71. It prevents the occurrence of an event that the movement of the game ball is disturbed on the way and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state before the ball enters the second special figure winning device 34. It becomes possible.

In the high-frequency support mode and in a situation where a plurality of hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) is stored in the second special diagram hold area 134, the game time is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the disconnection result. When is executed, the game times are executed in a fixed short period that is shorter than the shortest entering cycle when the game balls enter the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, although the upper limit number of the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, a new game ball may enter the second special figure winning device 34. Is reduced. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the event that the second hold information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the second special figure winning device 34. On the other hand, when the game time is executed with the second hold information as an execution trigger in the situation where another second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the game time is the shortest input. It is executed for a fixed long period of time which is equal to or more than the product of the sphere cycle and the upper limit number. As a result, when the second special information reservation area 134 does not store the second reservation information, the upper limit number of the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. Therefore, it is possible to cause a situation in which the upper limit number of the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134.

There is only one fixed short period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 113 for storing the information of the variable display period of the game times. Similarly, there is only one type of fixed long term. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 113 for storing the information of the variable display period of the game times.

The fixed long term is a period equal to or longer than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the upper limit number, and is a period less than the product of the shortest ball entry period and the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number. As a result, when the game time is executed for a fixed long time, the upper limit number of second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 in the situation where the game time is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls larger than the upper limit number from entering the second special figure winning device 34 in the situation where the game time is being executed. Become.

Fixed when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle in the high-frequency support mode and the game time is repeatedly executed with the second hold information corresponding to the deviation result as the execution time. A situation in which the game times for a fixed long period are executed once after the game times for a short period are executed 10 times repeatedly occurs. As a result, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game times is increased in order to prevent a situation in which the second suspension information is not acquired despite the occurrence of a ball entering the second special figure winning device 34, It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which the number of times is executed over a period of time that is somewhat long, and accordingly, it is possible to make the performance mode of the effect preferable.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the right side area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

42 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing the right side area PA3 in the present embodiment.

Similarly to the fourth embodiment, the right area PA3 is provided with a second special figure winning device 34, a special electric winning device 35, a through winning portion 36, and a special winning portion 155. The special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper side area PA1 and the right side area PA3 as in the fourth embodiment. A third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162 are provided at positions on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 35 in the right area PA3.

Both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 place the game ball supplied from above on either the left side of these distribution mechanisms 161, 162 or the vertically downward direction of these distribution mechanisms 161, 162. In addition to the distribution structure, each time one game ball is distributed, the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 are leftward → The distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 are vertically downward → The distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 are leftward → -As in the above, the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed. In this case, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 are distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 at a ratio of 1 to 2 and are distributed to the left at a ratio of 1 to 2 to the third distribution. It is distributed vertically below the mechanism 161. Further, the game balls supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 at a ratio of one to two, and the fourth distribution mechanism at a ratio of one to two. It is distributed vertically below 162.

The third distribution mechanism 161 is located downstream of the special electric prize winning device 35 in the right area PA3, and the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning part 36, the special winning part 155, and the fourth shaking in the right area PA3. It is provided at a position upstream of the minute mechanism 162. Between the special electric prize winning device 35 and the third distribution mechanism 161, a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 without winning the special electric prize winning device 35 is surely supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. A guiding portion 163 directed to the third sorting mechanism 161 is formed by the large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. In other words, in the right area PA3, the game balls that will flow into the downstream side of the third distribution mechanism 161 are reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 before flowing into the downstream side.

The right area PA3 is provided with a fifth guide rail 164 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 to the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. The fourth distribution mechanism 162 is provided at a position where the game balls are guided by the fifth guide rail 164, and the game balls are distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 and guided by the fifth guide rail 164. Is reliably supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The fifth guide rail 164 is provided so that gaming balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 will not win the fourth distribution mechanism 162. Further, the game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 are controlled by the seventh guide rail 166 and the eighth guide rail 167, which will be described later, by the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, and the special winning portion 155. Winning a prize is blocked.

The right area PA3 is provided with a sixth guide rail 165 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to the lower left position of the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the sixth guide rail 165, and the game ball that is distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the sixth guide rail 165 is sure. The player wins the through prize winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, the winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA and continues to flow down as it is in the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 flows down vertically, it is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 that are present on the right side of the through winning portion 36. There is no such thing.

The right area PA3 is provided with a seventh guide rail 166 for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to positions vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game balls are guided by the seventh guide rail 166, and the game is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166. The ball surely wins the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is set in the winning state when the through winning part 36 is won. The accepting state ends and returns to the non-accepting state when one of the conditions that one game ball is won in the second special figure winning combination device 34 and that the acceptance period elapses. When one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134. Hold information is stored in.

On the other hand, if the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball that is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 is the second special drawing. Without passing the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 of the second special figure winning device 34 is vertically penetrated. An eighth guide rail 167 is provided so as to guide the game ball, which passes through the passage 59a of the second special drawing winning device 34 in the vertical direction, further vertically downward. Further, a special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the eighth guide rail 167.

The special winning portion 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 155 are guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 155 is provided in the shape of a gate that penetrates in the vertical direction like the through winning portion 36, and the game balls that have won the special winning portion 155 remain in the game area PA. The flow may be continued. When one game ball is won in the special winning portion 155, three game balls are paid out. The game balls that are distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 but do not win the second special map winning device 34 are guided by the eighth guide rail 167 to be special. The winning portion 155 is surely won.

In a configuration in which the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the third distribution mechanism 161, and the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the fourth distribution mechanism 162, a fourth distribution is provided at a lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. When the distribution mechanism 162 is provided, the game balls are distributed to the third distribution mechanism 161 in a situation where both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 distribute the game balls to the left. When supplied, the game ball is guided to the through winning portion 36, and both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are in a distribution state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. When the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in that situation, the game ball is not guided to either the second special prize winning device 34 or the through winning part 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is leftward. The game balls are distributed to the distribution state. In that situation, when the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and the third distribution mechanism 161 distributes the game ball vertically downward. It becomes a state and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 becomes a distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. When the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in that situation, the game ball is not guided to either the second special prize winning device 34 or the through winning part 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is leftward. The game balls are distributed to the distribution state. In this configuration, each time a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, a state in which it is guided to the through winning part 36 → a state in which it is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning part 36 → A state in which the player is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34→a state in which the second special drawing winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 are not guided→a state guided to the through winning portion 36→... The state in which the sphere is guided is sequentially switched.

In the above configuration, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the through winning portion 36 are not guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and further The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the next order are guided to the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for the game ball to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning of the through winning portion 36 occurs. By utilizing this secured period, it becomes possible to perform variable display of the picture on the general figure display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set so that the variable display of the picture on the public figure display unit 46 is completed and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special drawing winning device 34 is completed within the secured period. , Even when the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. Until then, the second special figure winning device 34 can be made to be in the receiving state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure winning device 34 is surely transferred to the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to make a prize.

The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the following order of the game balls to be guided to the second special drawing winning device 34 are not guided to the through winning part 36, and further next. The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in order are guided to the through winning part 36. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special prize winning device 34 in the receiving state to the occurrence of a prize to the through winning portion 36. The through winning portion 36 invalidates the winning when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. Even if the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, the MPU 112 thereafter puts the second special figure winning device 34 into the non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute the process of No., and the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalidated until the process is completed. In this case, since the shortest period required from the occurrence of the prize to the second special figure winning combination device 34 in the receiving state to the generation of the prize to the through winning portion 36 is secured for a long time, By the time the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 reach the through prize winning unit 36 in the following order of the game balls to be won in the 2 special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is set. The process of setting the non-acceptance state is surely completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning in the through winning part 36 is valid is surely completed.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following another mode may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the low probability state in the first to third embodiments, the winning of the through winning portion 36 may be invalidated, and the pattern on the universal figure display portion 46 based on the winning of the through winning portion 36. However, the branch winning device 37 may not be opened. In this case, whether or not the branch winning device 37 is opened can be clearly differentiated between the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, in the low frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the winning in the through winning portion 36 may be invalidated, and the pattern in the universal figure display portion 46 based on the winning in the through winning portion 36. However, the second special figure winning a prize device 34 may not be in the accepting state. In this case, whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state can be clearly different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

(2) In the low probability state in the first to third embodiments, when a prize is awarded to the through prize winning portion 36, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 46 is reliably executed and the branch winning device 37 The opening/closing control of may be surely executed. Even in this case, the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is performed at the timing when the game balls are supplied toward the branch winning device 37 by the distribution mechanisms 71 and 72 as in the first to third embodiments. By adopting a configuration in which the branch winning device 37 has already been completed and is in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the winning of the branch winning device 37 substantially in the low probability state. Further, in the low frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments, when a prize is awarded to the through prize winning portion 36, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure displaying portion 46 is surely executed and the second special figure is displayed. The winning control of the winning device 34 may be surely executed. Even in this case, as in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the second special prize is won at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the second special prize winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71. With the configuration in which the acceptance control of the device 34 has already been completed and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, in the low frequency support mode, the second special figure winning device 34 is won. It is possible to prevent it from substantially occurring.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, in the high-probability state, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed reliably when a prize is paid to the through winning part 36, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the probability is high, the branch prize device 37 is opened when the open lottery process is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through prize portion 36 and the open lottery process results in an open win. It may be configured to be in a state. However, in order to increase the frequency of the branch winning device 37 being in the open state in the high probability state, it is preferable that the probability of being an open prize in the high probability state is higher than the probability of being an open prize in the low probability state. In addition, in a high probability state, it may happen that the winning is not open, but it may be configured so that the winning is open with a probability of about 100%. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning control of the second special prize winning device 34 is configured to be surely executed when the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. The winning lottery process is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through winning part 36 even in the high frequency support mode, and when the winning lottery process is performed, the second prize The special figure winning device 34 may be configured to be in a receiving state. However, in order to increase the frequency of the second special drawing winning device 34 being in the winning state in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the winning in the high frequency support mode is set higher than the probability of winning the winning in the low frequency support mode. Is preferred. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, it may happen that the winning is not accepted, but it may be configured so that the winning is won with a probability of about 100%.

(4) In the first to third embodiments, when the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed in the second high probability state, after the opening time by the short opening period is first executed and the closing continuation period elapses. Although the opening times are performed in the long opening period, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening times may be one time that continues for an opening period longer than the long opening period. In this case, the timing at which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and the opening period thereof is the shortest with respect to the game ball supplied to the through winning part 36. It is assumed that the branch prize device 37 is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after reaching three at the launch cycle reach the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize device 37. As a result, by supplying the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism 3 after the game balls supplied to the through winning part 36. The game balls supplied to 71 enter the branch winning device 37, and the game balls flow into the second lead-out area 65d. In addition, since the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 one and two after the game balls supplied to the through winning portion 36 are not distributed to the branch winning device 37, branching is performed. Even if the winning device 37 is maintained in the open state, only the game balls after the above three will enter the branch winning device 37.

(5) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 is not provided, and when the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 flows into the second lead-out area 65d, the second Although the special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state, it may be configured such that no privilege is given when the special drawing winning device 34 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. In this case, in both the first high probability state and the second high probability state, the game balls that enter the branch winning device 37 can flow into the second derivation region 65d, but the second high probability state The probability that the game ball will flow into the second derivation region 65d may be higher than that in the first high probability state.

(6) In the first to third embodiments, the distribution directions of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the direction toward the through winning part 36 and the direction toward the branch entrance 61. , And the direction toward the juxtaposed region of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are not limited to three directions, and may be four or more directions. For example, the first special prize winning device 33 and the second special prize winning device 34 are laterally spaced apart from each other, and the game balls and the first distributing mechanism 71 are vertically distributed by the first distributing mechanism 71. By arranging the game balls that are distributed to the right by different regions, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is set to the through winning portion 36. There may be four directions, that is, the direction toward the branch entrance 61, the direction toward the first special figure winning device 33, and the direction toward the second special figure winning device 34.

(7) In the first to third embodiments, the number of distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 are not limited to the same configuration. Alternatively, the number of distribution states may be different. For example, the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 is three types of left, vertically downward, and right as in the first to third embodiments, whereas the first distribution is the same. The number of distribution states of the mechanism 71 may be two types, that is, leftward and vertically downward. In this case, the number of game balls required for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to complete one round is six.

(8) In the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 may not be provided. Even in this case, by arranging the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, and the branch winning device 37 collectively in the right side area PA3, they are directed to the right side area PA3. By continuing the firing operation in which the game balls are supplied, it is possible to aim for all the prizes of the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the through winning part 36, and the branch winning device 37. Become.

(9) In the first to third embodiments, the privilege when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c of the branch winning device 37 is that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state. Is a different privilege, and the privilege when the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37 may be a privilege different from that of the second special figure winning device 34 being in the accepting state. .. For example, to increase the number of game balls available to the player regardless of whether the game balls flow into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or the second derivation region 65d. While the process is executed, the number of game balls to be increased is different when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and when the game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d. May be In this case, at least one of the number of game balls to be increased may be the same as the number of game balls to be increased when the branch winning detection sensor 66a detects the game ball, and the increase target is increased. The number of game balls to be increased may be smaller than that of the game balls, or the number of game balls to be increased may be larger than that of the game balls.

Further, for example, when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the reservation information is stored in the first special view reservation area 133, and When the game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d and the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the hold information may be stored in the second special figure hold area 134. In this case, even if the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not provided, the suspension information of a type corresponding to the flow-down result of the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 is acquired. It becomes possible to do.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball flows into the branch prize device 37 on the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c, the first special figure prize device 33 is surely placed in the accepting state. Instead, the first special prize winning device 33 may be in the accepting state by winning the winning in the lottery process executed when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detecting sensor 66b. As a result, the situation in which the first special figure winning combination device 33 is in the receiving state is diversified. In addition, when the game sphere flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37, the second special figure winning device 34 does not surely enter the receiving state, but the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. A configuration may be employed in which the second special figure winning combination device 34 is set in the acceptance state by winning the winning in the lottery process executed upon the detection. As a result, the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state is diversified.

(11) In the first to third embodiments described above, the game balls that enter the branch winning device 37 are limited to a configuration in which they flow into either the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or the second derivation region 65d. However, it may be configured to flow into any one of three or more kinds of derivation regions. For example, when a third special figure winning device is provided separately from the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34, and a game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the third derivation region. May be configured to execute the acceptance control of the third special drawing winning device. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the manner of branching the game balls in the branch winning device 37.

(12) In the first to third embodiments described above, even if the game ball is detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a of the branch prize device 37, the payout of the game ball may not be executed, and the first trigger detection sensor 66b. Alternatively, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the payout of the game ball with respect to the winning of the branch winning device 37 may be executed.

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the switching piece 67 is always arranged in the retracted position in the first high probability state, and the switching piece 67 is always arranged in the guiding position in the second high probability state. The configuration may be changed. Even in this case, the game ball that entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state surely flows into the first derivation region 65c, and the game that entered the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state. The sphere will surely flow into the second lead-out area 65d.

(14) Even in the case of a game ball other than the game balls distributed to the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first special prize winning device 33, the second At least one of the special drawing winning device 34, the through winning part 36, and the branch winning device 37 may be allowed to win. As a result, it is possible to diversify the route through which a prize is won in the prize winning unit.

(15) In the first to third embodiments, one game ball is won in the branch winning device 37 and two game balls are won in one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. The number of game balls is the same as the number of game balls required for one combination of the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the total payout amount of the game balls due to the above-mentioned winning may be smaller or larger than the number of game balls required for one round. Further, in the fourth embodiment, one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, and the number of game balls required for the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 to make one round. The same number of game balls is paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game balls paid out for winning the second special figure winning device 34 is required to make one round as described above. The number may be smaller than the number, or may be larger than the number.

(16) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are configured to be electrically driven to switch between the receiving state and the non-receiving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by physical driving. For example, in order to switch the first special figure winning device 33 from the non-accepting state to the accepting state while providing the first receiving portion that can be displaced at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c can reliably collide. The member and the first receiving portion are connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when a game ball is received in the first receiving portion, the first receiving portion is displaced and the first special figure winning combination device 33 is switched from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. In addition, the first special prize winning device 33 is provided with a second receiving portion at a position where the game balls that have won the first special prize winning device 33 surely collide, and two game balls are provided in the second receiving portion. In the case of receiving the second receiving portion, the displacement amount of the second receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to receiving the two game balls, so that the first special figure winning device 33 switches from the receiving state to the non-receiving state. The configuration. In addition, a third receiving portion is provided which can be displaced at a position where the game balls that have flowed into the second lead-out area 65d are surely collided, and a member for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. The third receiving portion is connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when a game ball is received in the third receiving portion, the third receiving portion is displaced and the second special figure winning combination device 34 is switched from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. In addition, the second special prize winning device 34 is provided with a fourth receiving portion at a position where the game balls won in the second special prize winning device 34 reliably collide, and two game balls are provided in the fourth receiving portion. In the case of receiving, the second receiving portion 34 switches from the receiving state to the non-receiving state because the displacement amount of the fourth receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to receiving two game balls. The configuration. According to the above configuration, it is not necessary for the MPU 112 to execute the acceptance control of the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34.

(17) In the third embodiment, the special winning portion 142 is not provided vertically below the branch entrance 61, but the special winning portion 142 is provided vertically below the through winning portion 36. It may be configured to have. In this case, regardless of whether or not a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37 while one combination of the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, the special prize portion 142 is provided. Will be awarded. Therefore, when the winning to the branch winning device 37 does not occur, while the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, the first combination makes one round. When the same number of game balls as the game balls supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 are paid out and a prize is generated in the branch winning device 37, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. While the combination of states makes one revolution, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out during the one revolution.

(18) In the fourth embodiment, the special winning portion 155 is not provided vertically below the second special drawing winning device 34, but the special winning portion 155 is vertically below the through winning portion 36. Alternatively, it may be provided at a position guided by the first guide rail 152. In this case, it is possible to win the special winning portion 155 regardless of whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 wins while the sorting state of the first sorting mechanism 71 makes one round. Become. Therefore, when no prize is paid to the second special figure winning device 34, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is one cycle. When the number of game balls is the same as the number of game balls to be paid out and a prize is given to the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one rotation while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one rotation. In the meantime, more game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out.

(19) The distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the positional relationship between the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning part 36 are not limited to those in the fourth embodiment. , For example, the through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game balls that are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided, and the game balls that are distributed vertically downward are guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special prize winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where the game balls that are sorted to the right by the first sorting mechanism 71 are guided. In addition, the through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game balls that are vertically distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided, and the game balls that are distributed to the left are guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special prize winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where the game balls that are sorted to the right by the first sorting mechanism 71 are guided.

(20) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state, one game ball enters the second special figure winning device 34, so that the second The special figure winning device 34 is not limited to the non-accepting state, and a predetermined number of two or more game balls enter the second special figure winning device 34 so that the second special figure winning device 34 34 may be in a non-accepting state. In this case, even if the second special figure winning a prize device 34 is in the receiving state in a predetermined lap when the distribution state of the first allocating mechanism 71 makes one lap, the second special figure winning a prize device 34 becomes the first lap in the lap after the predetermined lap. The condition for the 2 special figure winning device 34 to switch to the non-accepting state is satisfied.

(21) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, when the game information corresponding to the disengagement result is repeatedly executed with the holding information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second holding information) of the second special figure holding area 134 as a trigger, The shortest winning cycle, the fixed short period, and the fixed long period are set to the second special prize winning device 34 so that the game time is played once for the fixed short period after the game time is set for the fixed short period 10 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a configuration in which a fixed long-duration game time is performed once after the fixed short-duration game time is performed a predetermined number of times less than 10, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game times for a fixed short period are performed once after a predetermined number of times greater than 10 times have been performed. Further, the game times may be performed a fixed number of times a predetermined number of times, whereas the game times may be performed two or three times for a fixed period of time.

(22) The fourth to fifth embodiments are not limited to the configuration in which the fixed short period is only one kind, and there are a plurality of periods shorter than the shortest winning cycle to the second special figure winning device 34. There may be a configuration in which there are types. Further, the fixed long term is not limited to the configuration having only one type, and there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of types having a period equal to or longer than the shortest winning cycle to the second special figure winning device 34. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the game times.

(23) In the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment. The ball-in portion to which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. For example, the distribution target of the game balls by the distribution means may be the general winning part 31 and the special electric prize winning device 35, and the first special figure normal winning part 32, the second special figure winning device 34 and the special electric prize winning device. The configuration may be 35.

(24) In the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and in the fifth embodiment. The distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are not limited to the configuration in which the distribution direction is changed every time one game ball is supplied to the distribution means. When the distribution state of the distribution means is a state in which the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, when the number of game balls of two or more triggers is supplied to the distribution means, the distribution direction is different from the predetermined distribution direction. It may be configured to change to a state in which the game balls are distributed in the distribution direction. Further, when the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, when two or more game balls of the number of triggers are supplied to the distribution means, the game is distributed in a distribution direction different from the predetermined distribution direction. Change to the state of distributing balls, in the case of distributing game balls in a specific distribution direction, when the number of game balls different from the above trigger number is supplied to the distribution means, it becomes a specific distribution direction. May be configured to change to a state in which game balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

(25) In the above-described first to third embodiments, in the situation where the acceptance control is executed for either the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34, the winning of the through winning part 36 is invalid. However, even if the acceptance control is being executed, the winning of the through winning part 36 is enabled, and in the situation, the winning of the through winning part 36 occurs The variable display of the pattern on the display unit 46 may be started, and after the variable display of the pattern, the opening control of the branch winning apparatus 37 may be started. In this case, the game balls necessary to switch the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state of the special prize winning devices 33 and 34 are the special prize winning devices 33 and 34. When the game balls are supplied to the through winning part 36 in a situation where they are not supplied, it is possible to prevent a waiting time from being activated until the winning of the through winning part 36 is activated. Becomes Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the winning of the through winning portion 36 is invalidated in the situation where the winning control is executed for the second special figure winning device 34, but the winning control is executed. Even when the winning is awarded to the through winning portion 36 even in a situation where the winning is awarded to the through winning portion 36 in the situation, the variable display of the pattern is started on the universal figure displaying portion 46. At the same time, the acceptance control of the second special drawing winning device 34 may be started after the variable display of the pattern. In this case, the first distribution mechanism 71 is passed through in a situation where the game balls necessary for the second special figure winning device 34 to switch from the receiving state to the non-receiving state are not supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. When the game balls are supplied to the winning portion 36, it is possible to prevent a waiting time from being activated until the winning of the through winning portion 36 is activated.

(26) In the above-described first to third embodiments, the situation in which the variable display of the picture is being displayed on the public figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed, and the special symbol winning device. When a prize is awarded to the through prize winning portion 36 while the acceptance control of 33, 34 is being executed, the trigger information for the prize is stored on hold with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as an upper limit. May be Then, the situation in which the variable display of the pattern is being displayed on the public figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed, and the situation in which the acceptance control of the special prize winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed. When the trigger information is held and stored in a situation other than the above, the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 46 is started with the trigger information as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to generate many triggers for executing the opening/closing control of the branch winning device 37. In addition, in the above-described fourth to fifth embodiments, through in the situation in which the variable display of the picture is displayed on the universal figure display unit 46 and the situation in which the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is being executed. When a prize is generated in the prize winning unit 36, the trigger information for the prize may be held and stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as an upper limit. Then, the opportunity information is held and stored in a situation in which neither the situation in which the variable display of the picture is displayed on the public figure display unit 46 nor the situation in which the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is being executed is performed. In this case, the variable information is displayed on the universal figure display unit 46 with the trigger information as a trigger. As a result, it becomes possible to generate many triggers for executing the acceptance control of the second special prize winning device 34.

(27) The open period of the branch winning device 37 may be longer or shorter than the period in the first to third embodiments. Further, the acceptance period of the second special figure winning combination device 34 may be longer or shorter than that of the fourth to fifth embodiments.

(28) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 may be arranged upside down.

(29) In the special electric prize winning device 35, a V prize area, a distribution member for allocating the game balls to any of the V prize area and other areas, and a V prize detection sensor for detecting the game balls flowing into the V prize area. May be provided, and when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor, the winning/winning lottery mode after execution of the opening/closing execution mode may be a high-probability mode. In this case, when the highly accurate correspondence result is obtained, the opening/closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the game balls can flow into the V winning area, and when the highly accurate correspondence result is obtained, the opening/closing execution mode is performed. The opening/closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the inflow of game balls is impossible. In addition to the special electric prize winning device 35, a separate winning device provided with a V winning detection sensor is provided, and when the highly accurate correspondence result is obtained, the opening/closing execution mode is set in such a manner that the different winning device can win. The open/close execution mode may be performed in such a manner that, when the result is low and the result is low, it is possible to win the prize in the different winning device.

(30) In the above first to third embodiments, when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the acceptance control of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed, the first special figure winning device 33. However, the first special figure winning device 33 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening round occurs in a predetermined round when each sorting state of the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72 makes one round, and the second opening round becomes the predetermined round. On the other hand, it may be configured to occur at the timing when the game ball can be supplied to the first special figure winning device 33 in the next lap. Moreover, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c and the acceptance control of the second special drawing winning device 34 is executed, the second special drawing winning device 34 is configured to be opened only once. The second special figure winning device 34 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening round occurs in a predetermined round when each sorting state of the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72 makes one round, and the second opening round becomes the predetermined round. On the other hand, it may be configured to occur at the timing when the game ball can be supplied to the second special prize winning device 34 in the next lap.

(31) When the high-probability state is set in each of the above embodiments, the high-probability state is not limited to the configuration in which the high-probability state continues until the next big hit result occurs, and the end reference number of times after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-probability state may be terminated when the game time is executed. In this case, the high-probability state can be shifted to the low-probability state even if the jackpot result does not occur. Therefore, for example, when a big hit result occurs triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the result is either a low probability correspondence result or a high probability correspondence result, whereas the second special figure suspension is When the jackpot result is generated triggered by the hold information stored in the area 134, it may be configured to surely provide the highly accurate response result.

(32) In the first to third embodiments described above, when the jackpot result is triggered by the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the first high-precision correspondence result is not obtained. The configuration may be such that the first highly accurate response result can be obtained.

(33) The number of prize balls in each of the above-mentioned embodiments is not limited and is arbitrary. For example, when one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, the number of prize balls is first. The special figure normal winning part 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 may have a configuration with more or less than the number of prize balls when one game ball is won. In addition, the number of prize balls when one game ball is won in the first special diagram normal winning portion 32 and the number of prize balls when one game ball is won in the first special diagram winning device 33 are different. May be In this case, the number of prize balls of the former may be larger or smaller than the number of prize balls of the latter.

(34) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 126 is controlled by the sound emission control device 121 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 101, display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 101. The device 126 may control the audio emission control device 121. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 121 and the display control device 126 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 101, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 101. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sound emission control device 121 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 121 to the display control device 126 are also arbitrary.

(35) The device for which the game-use effect is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the game-use effect is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. Alternatively, the game light effect may be executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the game time effect may be executed by a combination of all or some of the above-described aspects. Good.

(36) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the first special figure reservation area 133 and the second special figure reservation area 134 are not separately provided, and the first special figure normal winning portion 32 and the second special figure are provided. Even if a game ball enters any of the winning devices 34, the reserved information may be stored in a common special figure reservation area. In this case, the pending information acquired when the winning of the first special figure normal winning portion 32 occurs and the pending information acquired when the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 occurs are stored separately. Since it is not performed, the win/fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing are executed in the same manner for any of the suspension information.

(37) In each of the above-described embodiments, the holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 134 is not limited to the configuration in which the holding information stored in the first special drawing holding area 133 is given priority over the holding information. On the contrary, the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 may be configured to be preferentially consumed over the reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. Even information may be digested in the order of acquisition.

(38) The case where the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 is the object of the hit determination, and the case where the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the object of the hit determination. The jackpot results may be distributed in the same manner.

(39) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine provided with other accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable is provided with a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the rotation of the reel is started by doing so.

Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to the island facility. In addition, the player cannot replenish the game balls to the pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed when the number of game balls that can be used is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a game ball is fired when it is performed and the number of available game balls is subtracted. In this case, a game that can be used when a prize ball is generated due to a winning of the first special prize winning device 33, the second special prize winning device 34, the branch winning device 37, the special winning portions 142, 155, etc. The number of spheres will increase on the data.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A predetermined ball entrance portion (branch entrance 61) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which the game balls entering the predetermined entrance portion flow down,
Predetermined detection means (branch winning detection sensor 66a) for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion,
A predetermined giving means (a function of executing the process of step S905 in the MPU 112, the payout control device 107) for giving a bonus to the player when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means;
The game ball provided in the predetermined passage portion on the downstream side of the detection area by the predetermined detection means and passing through the detection area is a first area (downstream side of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation). Guiding means (switching piece 67) for guiding to any one of a plurality of areas including the area 65d),
First granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area (a function of executing steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112) When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, not only the privilege is given by the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering part, but also the benefit is obtained by the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering part flowing into the first area. Granted. As a result, a plurality of benefits are given by the game balls entering the predetermined ball entering portion, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game balls enter the predetermined ball entering portion. Become. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Particularly, when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means provided upstream of the guide means for guiding the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion to any area, the privilege is given, and further, by the guide means. Is also configured to give a privilege when a game ball flows into the downstream first region. Accordingly, even if the passage length dimension of the predetermined passage portion continuing to the first region is increased, it is possible to quickly give the privilege to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined insertion portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the passage structure of the predetermined passage portion that continues to the first region, while allowing the privilege to be given to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined passage portion early. ..

Features A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein a privilege different from the privilege provided by the predetermined granting unit is awarded even if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion does not flow into the first region.

According to the characteristic A2, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball-in portion, regardless of whether or not the game ball flows into the first area, the privilege for detecting the game ball by the predetermined detector is provided. Other benefits are granted. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion.

In addition, with the configuration of the above-mentioned characteristic A1, regardless of which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows in, the predetermined detection means provided on the upstream side of the guide position by the guide means. A privilege is granted when a game ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the configuration for guiding the player to any of the areas while allowing the privilege to be given to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion early.

Features A3. The amusement machine according to the feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the privilege granted by the predetermined granting device and the privilege granted by the first granting device are of different types.

According to the characteristic A3, a plurality of types of benefits are given for the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. Further, the privilege is given by the predetermined granting means by the game ball being detected by the predetermined detecting means on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guiding means, and the privilege is given by the first granting means from the guidance position by the guiding means. Is also performed by the game ball flowing into the first region on the downstream side. Accordingly, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of benefits are provided for a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, the plurality of types of benefits can be provided in stages.

Features A4. The predetermined giving means, when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means, gives a privilege to increase the number of game balls available to the player,
Any of the characteristics A1 to A3, wherein the first granting means grants a privilege different from the privilege of increasing the number of game balls usable by the player when the game balls flow into the first area. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A4, a plurality of types of benefits are given for the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. In addition, the game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means on the upstream side of the guide position by the guide means, and a privilege to increase the number of game balls available to the player is given first, and then the guide position by the guide means. Since the game balls flow into the first region on the downstream side, a privilege different from the privilege for increasing the number of game balls usable by the player is provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of benefits in stages, while the benefits for increasing the number of game balls available to the player are given early.

Features A5. A first variable ball entering means (first special prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33),
In any one of the characteristics A1 to A4, the first granting means causes the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic A5, when the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering part and flowing down the predetermined passage part flows into the first area, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting that the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion will flow into the first area. .. By providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1 in the configuration, the privilege is provided by the predetermined granting unit when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting unit on the upstream side of the guide position by the guide unit. Thereby, in order to secure a period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entrance portion flows into the first area, the distance from the predetermined ball entrance portion to the guide position by the guide means is set to some extent. Even if secured, it is possible to early grant a privilege for the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion.

Features A6. A second variable ball entering means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult 34),
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second giving means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state. Function for executing the process of S910),
A gaming machine according to feature A5, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic A6, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entering means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entering means that is in the first state differs depending on the guide mode by the guide means, and the player to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of.

Features A7. A lottery process is executed on the basis of occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable ball means, and a lottery process is executed on the basis of occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball means. A lottery execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1001, S1102 and S1103 in the MPU 112) for executing
In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means, the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is more advantageous to the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

According to the characteristic A7, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entering means than to enter the game ball into the first variable ball entering means. As a result, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion will be guided to the second area, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature A8. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area or the probability of flowing into the first area is the first area. Is higher than the probability of flowing into different areas, the gaming machine according to any one of characteristics A1 to A7.

According to the characteristic A8, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion will surely flow into the first region or flow into the first region is high. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game balls easily flow into the first area.

Features A9. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
As a situation in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the probability of being in the first situation or being in the first situation is higher than the probability of being in the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which is also high.

According to the characteristic A9, the predetermined ball entering portion cannot or cannot enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance portion will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. In the situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area.

Feature A10. Second granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the second area (a function of executing steps S804, S805, and S910 of the MPU 112) Equipped with
When the game state is the second game state (second high probability state), the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area or the probability that the game ball flows into the second area is in the first area. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, which has a higher probability of inflow.

According to the characteristic A10, in the first gaming state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion will flow into the first area or into the first area is high, while in the second gaming state the predetermined passage portion will be opened. The probability that the game ball flowing down will flow into the second region or will flow into the second region is high. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game balls easily flow into the first area and a state in which the game balls easily flow into the second area.

Feature A11. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
As a situation in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the probability of being in the first situation or being in the first situation is higher than the probability of being in the second situation. Is also a high configuration,
In the second game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the probability of being in the second situation or being in the second situation is higher than the probability of being in the first situation. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, which has a high configuration.

According to the characteristic A11, the predetermined ball entering portion cannot or cannot enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance portion will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. In the situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. In addition, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering section. Is or is likely to be in the second situation. Thereby, in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state in which is easily inflowed.

Feature A12. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball receiving portion (through winning portion 36).
One of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction of the supplied game ball on the upstream side of the specific ball-in portion and the predetermined ball-in portion in the game area. And a distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) for sequentially changing the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball-in portion in this case.

According to the characteristic A12, the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the first state on the condition that at least one of the game balls has entered the specific ball entrance portion. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance portion also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific ball entrance portion. In this case, the distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entering portion and the predetermined ball entering portion. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game balls are supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball toward the predetermined ball entering portion. Is supplied. With this, it becomes possible to supply the game ball toward the specific ball entering portion by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the distributing means, and toward the predetermined ball entering portion. It becomes possible to supply the game balls. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency of supply of the game ball toward the specific ball entrance portion and the frequency of supply of the game ball toward the predetermined ball entrance portion are respectively set by the designer as desired. It is possible to set the frequency. Furthermore, it is possible to allow the game balls to be supplied to the predetermined ball entrance part after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game balls were supplied to the specific ball entrance part, and the game balls entered the specific ball entrance part. It is possible to ensure that the game ball is reliably supplied to the predetermined ball entering portion in the first state when the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state with at least one of the conditions ..

Features A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.

According to the characteristic A13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner.

Feature A14. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball-in part, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The game machine according to the feature A12 or A13, wherein the game machine can enter the predetermined ball entering portion.

According to the characteristic A14, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entering part and the predetermined ball entering part. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the specific ball-in portion and the predetermined ball-in portion to a desired frequency.

Feature A15. Characteristic A12 to A12, wherein the game balls supplied to the distributing means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed to the first distributing direction by the distributing means are distributed to the second distributing direction. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

According to the characteristic A15, the game balls that are supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of game balls are sorted in the second sorting direction with respect to the game balls that are sorted in the first sorting direction by the sorting means. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entering part. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the predetermined ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of being supplied, it is possible to secure a period until the predetermined ball entering portion is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

According to the characteristic A16, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period from the time the game ball enters the specific ball entrance part to the time the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entrance part. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the predetermined ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of being surely supplied, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period as a period until the predetermined ball entering part is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering part. Become.

Feature A17. An operation execution means (universal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entering unit,
The switching control means, when executing the switching control, is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started on the basis of the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or A16, which is characterized by being present.

According to the characteristic A17, when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, the operation executing means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the predetermined ball entering portion becomes the first state. .. Thereby, it becomes possible to let the player recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the predetermined ball entering portion will be in the first state. In addition, the manager of the game hall can confirm whether or not the transition to the first state of the predetermined ball entrance portion is normal by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation is executed. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic A15 or A16, there is a certain period as a period from when the game ball enters the specific ball entering part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entering part. Has been secured. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the predetermined ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period in which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means before the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the first state.

Feature A18. As a situation in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high-probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in the situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. The configuration has a higher probability than the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation is the second situation or the second situation in the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than that of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that is later supplied to the sorting means and that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball supplied to the sorting means after a number of games, and the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the second region. Any one of features A15 to A17. Game machine.

According to the characteristic A18, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. In such a situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. In addition, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering section. Is or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the second state, the game ball is in the first area. It is possible to create a state in which is easily inflowed.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game balls are supplied to the specific ball-in portion in the first situation, the game balls are distributed to the distribution means after a predetermined number. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entrance part and are supplied to the first area. In the second situation, the game balls supplied to the specific ball entrance part are supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of them. A game ball that enters a predetermined ball entering portion and is supplied to the second area. Thereby, while keeping the operation mode of the distribution means in common, it is possible to supply the game ball to the first area in the first situation and to supply the game ball to the second area in the second situation. It will be possible. In addition, while the number of game balls required from the supply of the game balls to the specific ball entering portion to the supply of the game balls to the predetermined ball entering portion is the common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. It is possible to supply the game balls to the second area in the second situation by supplying the balls.

Features A19. When the switching control is started, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second region in the second period. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing the processing of steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112),
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that it is the first period when the game balls that have been supplied to the sorting means after the number of games and have entered the predetermined ball entering portion pass the guide position by the guide means. The control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that it is the second period when the game balls that have been supplied to the sorting means after the number of games and that have entered the predetermined ball entering portion pass the guide position by the guide means. The game machine according to feature A18, in which a control start timing is set.

According to the characteristic A19, only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entrance corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic A18 can be obtained. It will be possible.

Feature A20. An operation execution means (universal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation on the basis of a game ball entering the specific ball entering unit,
The switching control means, when executing the switching control, is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started on the basis of the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. Yes,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during the period corresponding to the second situation. The operation control means for causing the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation (the function of executing the processing of step S407 and step S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the step S1211 and step of the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature A19, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S1212.

According to the characteristic A20, only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means in accordance with each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic A18 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature A21. A first variable ball entering means (first special prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33),
When the game sphere flows into the first area, the first granting means causes the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state,
A third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
A game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entering device when the distribution direction of the distribution device is the third distribution direction. Any one of features A12 to A20. Game machine.

According to the characteristic A21, when the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering part and flowing down the predetermined passage part flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting that the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion will flow into the first area. .. In the configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entering portion, and the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entering means when the distribution direction by the distributing means is the third distribution direction. As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means, the game balls are supplied to the specific ball entering portion, the predetermined ball entering portion, and the first variable ball entering means in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A22. Characteristic A21 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distributing means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distributing direction by the distributing means are distributed in the first distributing direction. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic A22, the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of distribution are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion.

Feature A23. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction is until the distribution means becomes in a state of distributing game balls in the first distribution direction. A special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball entering means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of game balls into the first area, that the number of game balls have been switched to the first variable ball entering means. Based on the above, the first variable ball entering means is brought into the second state (function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, wherein the special number is equal to or more than the switching trigger number.

According to the characteristic A23, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, after the switching trigger number of game balls are supplied to the first variable ball entering means by the distributing means, the distribution is performed. The distribution state of the means becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific ball entrance portion. Thereby, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific ball entering portion after the first variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a game ball entering the specific ball entering portion in a situation where the first variable ball entering means is in the second state.

Feature A24. A first variable ball entering means (first special prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33),
A second variable ball entering means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult 34),
Equipped with
When the game sphere flows into the first area, the first granting means causes the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state,
In the gaming machine, when the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second granting means causes the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state (step S804 in MPU 112). , A function of executing the processing of steps S805 and S910),
The first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are arranged side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and on the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side,
A third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A23, characterized in that a game ball is supplied toward the aggregation area when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction.

According to the characteristic A24, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entering means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entering means that is in the first state differs depending on the guide mode by the guide means, and the player to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of. In the configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. When the game sphere is supplied to the predetermined ball entrance portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, the aggregate area in which the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance means are provided Game balls are supplied to. With this, by playing the game balls so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls to the specific ball entering portion and the predetermined ball entering portion in a predetermined order. At the same time, regardless of whether the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area or the second area, the game ball is supplied to the variable ball entering means corresponding to the guided area. It becomes possible to do.

In particular, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are provided side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side. Accordingly, even if the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are not configured to be individually distributed by the distributing means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

Feature A25. When a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the above-mentioned specific number of game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. A game machine according to any one of features A12 to A24, characterized in that a process for increasing the number of different game balls can be executed by the specific number or more.

According to the characteristic A25, when a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner. In this case, a certain number or more of game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more can be executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means while the number of game balls available to the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature A26. When the game balls distributed by the distribution means by one round of the distribution state generate a ball entering the specific ball entering part and a ball entering the predetermined ball entering part, the distribution is performed. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the state makes one round, the game balls of the specific number or more are given to the player or the game ball that can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein processing for increasing the number by the specific number or more is executed.

According to the characteristic A26, when a game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where a specific ball entering part and a predetermined ball entering part can occur, the distribution state is one round. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player is increased by a specific number or more. The processing for causing is performed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means in a state where the ball entering the specific ball entering part and the ball entering the predetermined ball entering part can occur, the player is It becomes possible to play a game while not substantially reducing the number of usable game balls.

Feature A27. A special case in which the game balls distributed by the distribution unit enter when the game balls distributed by the distribution unit do not cause the ball to enter the predetermined ball entering unit until the distribution state makes one round. Equipped with a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special ball portion until the distribution state makes one round, the game balls of the specific number or more are played. The game machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein processing for increasing the number of game balls that is given to a player or usable by a player is performed by the specific number or more.

According to the characteristic A27, the game balls sorted by the sorting means enter the special entry part even if the entry into the predetermined entry part does not occur. Then, based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entering section, a certain number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that the player can use is increased by a certain number or more. The process of is executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

Feature A28. A special ball entering section (special winning section 142) into which game balls that have been distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means but do not enter the predetermined ball entering section enter;
A process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or giving the player more than the specified number of game balls based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entering section. The game machine according to feature A25 or A26, characterized in that

According to the characteristic A28, the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entering part even if they do not enter the predetermined ball entering part. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entering section, a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or more than a specific number of game balls is given to the player. To be executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features A1 to A28, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group A, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A specific winning portion (through winning portion 36) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
A special ball entry portion (a branch entrance 61 in the first to third embodiments, a second special figure winning device 34 in the fourth to fifth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A first state in which the game ball can enter the special ball portion and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the game ball based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific ball portion. And a switching control means (a function of executing processing during normal-figure fluctuation and processing during normal-power operation in the MPU 112) for switching control to each of
In a gaming machine equipped with
One of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction of the supplied game balls on the upstream side of the specific entrance ball portion and the special entrance ball portion in the game area. Distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied (in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72, and the fourth distribution mechanism). In the embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided, and in the fifth embodiment, the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162) are provided,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In this case, a game ball is supplied toward the special ball entering portion.

According to the feature B1, the special ball entering portion is in the first state on condition that at least one of the game balls has entered the specific ball entering portion. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entering portion also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

In this case, the distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied is provided upstream of the specific entrance portion and the special entrance portion. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game balls are supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball toward the special ball entering portion. Is supplied. With this, it becomes possible to supply the game balls toward the specific ball entering portion by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means, and toward the special ball entering portion. It becomes possible to supply the game balls. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency of the game ball being supplied to the specific ball entrance portion and the frequency of the game ball being supplied to the special ball entrance portion are respectively set by the designer as desired. It is possible to set the frequency. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the special ball entering section after a predetermined period has passed since the game ball was supplied to the specific ball entering section, and the game ball entered the specific ball entering section. It is possible to ensure that the game ball is reliably supplied to the special ball entering portion in the first state when the special ball entering portion is in the first state with at least one of the conditions ..

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means.

According to the characteristic B2, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner.

Feature B3. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball-in part, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The game machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein is able to enter the special entry portion.

According to the feature B3, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entering part and the special ball entering part. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the frequency of entering the specific ball entering portion and the special ball entering portion to a desired frequency.

Feature B4. Characteristic B1 to B1 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distributing means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed to the first distributing direction by the distributing means are distributed to the second distributing direction. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the characteristic B4, the game balls supplied by the distributing means after the predetermined number of game balls are distributed in the second distributing direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the first distributing direction by the distributing means, so that the specific entering ball It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the section to when the game ball is supplied to the special entrance section. Thereby, when the special ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the special ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period until the special ball entering portion is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

According to the feature B5, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period as a period from the game ball entering the specific ball entering part to the supply of the game ball to the special ball entering part. Thereby, when the special ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the special ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period until the special ball entering section is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. Become.

Feature B6. Before the state in which the game balls are distributed in the first distribution direction from the state in which the game balls are distributed in the first distribution direction becomes the state in which the game balls are distributed in the second distribution direction, the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction are The gaming machine described in the feature B4 or B5, wherein the game balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

According to the characteristic B6, the special ball entering section is used after the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section by utilizing the period in which the game ball is distributed toward the side different from the specific ball entering section and the special ball entering section. It is possible to secure a somewhat long period until the game balls are supplied to.

Feature B7. An operation execution means (universal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation on the basis of a game ball entering the specific ball entering unit,
The switching control means, when executing the switching control, is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started on the basis of the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B6.

According to the feature B7, when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion, the operation executing means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the special ball entering portion becomes the first state. .. As a result, the player can be made aware in advance that the special ball entry part may be in the first state. In addition, the manager of the game hall can confirm whether or not the special entrance portion is in the normal state by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation is executed. In this case, by providing the configuration of any one of the above characteristics B4 to B6, as a period from the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion until the game ball is supplied to the special ball entering portion Some period of time is secured. Thereby, when the special ball entering section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section, the game ball is in the special ball entering section which is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period in which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means before the special ball entering portion becomes the first state.

Feature B8. In a predetermined game state (first high probability state or second high probability state in the first to third embodiments, high frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments), the shortest distance to the distribution means. When game balls are being supplied in a supply cycle, the switching is performed over a specific period that is equal to or less than the period required from the supply of the game balls to the specific ball entering part to the supply of the game balls to the special ball entering part. A means for causing the operation executing means to perform a pre-operation (a function for executing the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and a processing of steps S1211 and S1212 in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment. A gaming machine according to Feature B7, which is provided with a function, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112).

According to the characteristic B8, when the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the specific entrance section, the game balls distributed by the distribution means to the special entrance section next are the special entrance sections. It is possible to make the special entrance portion be in the first state before reaching.

Feature B9. In a game state different from the predetermined game state, even if a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in the shortest supply cycle, the special ball entering portion is set to the first state and then the second state. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the gaming ball is supplied to the special ball-in portion after a period until the state is returned.

According to the characteristic B9, even if the special ball entering portion can be in the first state in a game state different from the predetermined game state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the special ball entering portion. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of a predetermined game state.

Feature B10. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which the game balls entering the special entrance portion flow down,
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c) and a second area (second lead-out area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67) to
First granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area (a function of executing steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112) When,
Equipped with
As a situation in which the special ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the special ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the special ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high-probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in a situation in which the game ball can enter the special entry part. The configuration has a higher probability than the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation is the second situation or the second situation in the situation in which the game ball can enter the special entry part. The probability is higher than that of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that is later supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the special ball portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The game ball supplied to the sorting means after the number of games, the game ball entering the special ball entering portion is guided to the second area, according to any one of features B4 to B9. Game machine.

According to the characteristic B10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the special ball entering section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the special ball entering section. In such a situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. In addition, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the special ball entering section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the special ball entering section. Is or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the special ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the special ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state in which is easily inflowed.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game balls are supplied to the specific ball-in portion in the first situation, the game balls are distributed to the distribution means after a predetermined number. The supplied game balls enter the special entrance section and are supplied to the first area, and in the second situation, are supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific entrance section. A game ball that enters the special ball entering portion is supplied to the second area. Thereby, while keeping the operation mode of the distribution means in common, it is possible to supply the game ball to the first area in the first situation and to supply the game ball to the second area in the second situation. It will be possible. In addition, while the number of game balls required from the supply of the game balls to the specific ball entering portion to the supply of the game balls to the special ball entering portion is a common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. It is possible to supply the game balls to the second area in the second situation by supplying the balls.

Feature B11. When the switching control is started, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second region in the second period. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing the processing of steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112),
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The game balls that are supplied to the sorting means after the number of games and the game balls that have entered the special entrance portion pass the guide position by the guide means, so that the switching is performed in the first period. The control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined values are given to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that it is the second period when the game balls supplied to the sorting means after the number of games and the game balls that have entered the special entrance portion pass the guide position by the guide means. The game machine according to feature B10, wherein a control start timing is set.

According to the characteristic B11, only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the special ball-inserting portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic B10 can be obtained. It will be possible.

Feature B12. An operation execution means (universal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation on the basis of a game ball entering the specific ball entering unit,
The switching control means, when executing the switching control, is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started on the basis of the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. Yes,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during the period corresponding to the second situation. The operation control means for causing the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation (the function of executing the processing of step S407 and step S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the step S1211 and step of the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature B11, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S1212.

According to the characteristic B12, only by adjusting the period in which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic B10 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature B13. A first variable ball entering means (first special prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33),
Means for causing the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state based on the entry of the game ball into the special ball entering portion (executes the processing of step S704, step S705 and step S908 in the MPU 112) Function)
Equipped with
A third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
The game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entering device when the distribution direction of the distribution device is the third distribution direction. Any one of features B1 to B12. Game machine.

According to the feature B13, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entering portion. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting the game ball to enter the special ball entering portion. In the configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied toward the special ball entering portion, and the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entering means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Thereby, by playing the game balls so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means, the game balls are supplied to the specific ball entering portion, the special ball entering portion, and the first variable ball entering means in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B14. Characteristic B13 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed to the third distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed to the first distribution direction. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic B14, the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit, and thus the first It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion.

Feature B15. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction is until the distribution means becomes in a state of distributing game balls in the first distribution direction. A special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, the first variable ball entering means is switched to the second variable ball entering means based on the fact that the number of game balls has been switched to the first variable ball entering means. And a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112) for setting the state,
The gaming machine according to feature B13 or B14, wherein the special number is equal to or more than the switching trigger number.

According to the feature B15, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, after the switching trigger number of game balls are supplied by the distributing means toward the first variable ball entering means, the distribution is performed. The distribution state of the means becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific ball entrance portion. Thereby, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific ball entering portion after the first variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the specific ball-in portion in the situation where the first variable ball-in device is in the second state.

Feature B16. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which the game balls entering the special entrance portion flow down,
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c) and a second area (second lead-out area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67) to
A first variable ball entering means (first special prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33),
A second variable ball entering means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult 34),
When a game ball flows into the first area, the first variable ball entering means causes the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state (a function of executing steps S704, S705 and S908 of the MPU 112). )When,
When the game ball flows into the second area, the second granting means for causing the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state (function of executing steps S804, S805 and S910 in the MPU 112) )When,
Equipped with
The first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are arranged side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and on the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side,
A third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized in that a game ball is supplied toward the aggregation area when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction.

According to feature B16, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entering means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entering means that is in the first state differs depending on the guide mode by the guide means, and the player to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of. In the configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. A game ball is supplied to the special ball entering portion, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are provided when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Game balls are supplied to. Thus, by playing the game balls to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls to the specific ball entering portion and the special ball entering portion in a predetermined order. At the same time, even if the game ball entering the special ball entering section is guided to either the first area or the second area, the game ball is supplied to the variable ball entering means corresponding to the guided area. It becomes possible to do.

In particular, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are provided side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side. Accordingly, even if the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are not configured to be individually distributed by the distributing means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

Feature B17. Characteristic B1 characterized in that after a specific number of game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means, game balls supplied to the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. A gaming machine described in any one of B16 to B16.

According to the characteristic B17, the game balls supplied to the sorting means after the specific number of game balls are sorted in the first sorting direction with respect to the gaming balls sorted in the second sorting direction by the sorting means. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the ball means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion.

Feature B18. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the second distribution direction, the second distribution direction is until the distribution means becomes in a state of distributing the game balls in the first distribution direction. It is a configuration in which a specific number of game balls are distributed to
When the special ball entering portion is in the first state, a means for setting the special ball entering portion to the second state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special ball entering portion (MPU112). Function for executing the processing of steps S1701 and S1703 in
The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the specific number is equal to or greater than the predetermined trigger number.

According to feature B18, when the special ball entering portion is in the first state, after a predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the special ball entering portion by the distributing means, the distribution of the distributing means is performed. The state is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entrance portion. As a result, when the special ball entering portion is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific ball entering portion after the special ball entering portion is in the second state. In the situation where the ball portion is in the second state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering portion.

Feature B19. The period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position at which the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position is the distribution The game balls distributed by the means in the second distribution direction become longer than the period required to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special ball entering portion from the predetermined height position. The gaming machine according to feature B17 or B18, wherein a passage configuration from the sorting means to the specific ball entry portion and a passage configuration from the sorting means to the special ball entry portion are set.

According to the characteristic B19, the period required for the game balls distributed by the distribution means in the first distribution direction to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position, Since the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means are set to be longer than the period required to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special ball entering portion from the predetermined height position, It is possible to secure a long period of time from when the game ball enters the special entrance part to when the game ball reaches the specific entrance part. As a result, when the special ball entering portion is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion after the special ball entering portion is in the second state based on the ball entering the special ball entering portion. It becomes possible to do so, and in the situation where the special ball entering portion is in the second state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering portion. In addition, since the entering period as described above is set by the passage configuration from the sorting means to the specific entry portion and the passage configuration from the sorting means to the special entry portion, It becomes possible to produce the above-mentioned effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature B20. A specific guide passage portion (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entrance ball portion,
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the special entrance ball portion,
Equipped with
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific entrance ball portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage portion to the special entrance ball portion. The game machine according to any one of features B17 to B19, which is set to be large.

According to feature B20, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific entrance ball portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage portion to the special entrance ball portion. By the setting, the period required for the game balls distributed by the distribution means in the first distribution direction to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position, It is possible to make it longer than the period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special ball entering portion from the predetermined height position. As a result, when the special ball entering portion is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion after the special ball entering portion is in the second state based on the ball entering the special ball entering portion. It becomes possible to do so, and in the situation where the special ball entering portion is in the second state, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering portion. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects by simply adjusting the passage length dimensions of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

Feature B21. The gaming machine according to feature B19 or B20, wherein the specific number is one.

According to the feature B21, the game ball supplied to the sorting means next to the game ball supplied to the special ball entering part is supplied to the specific ball entering part. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful game balls from being supplied from when the game balls are supplied to the special ball entering part to when the game balls are supplied to the specific ball entering part. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above feature B19 or B20, it becomes possible for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to enter the specific ball entering portion from a predetermined height position. The time required to reach the position is the time required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special entrance section from the predetermined height position. Can be longer than.

Feature B22. The second distribution direction is a direction vertically downward from the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B21, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means to a side different from a vertically downward direction.

According to the feature B22, the special ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distributing means are provided, so that the ball entering the specific ball entering portion is triggered. It is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the special ball entrance section that is possible. As a result, the movement of the game balls distributed toward the special ball entering section by the distribution means is in the middle, even though the special ball entering section is in the first state triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering section. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the special ball-entering portion is in the second state before being thrown into the special ball-entering portion.

Feature B23. An acquisition unit (a function for executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) which acquires predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball unit;
Game time control means (step S1006 in MPU 112) for controlling the game time execution means (second special figure display portion 45b) so that the game time operation is executed based on the acquisition of the predetermined information by the acquisition means. A function of executing the processing of step S1008),
Equipped with
The game time control means,
A game operation operation is executed over a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest game cycle when a game ball enters the special ball unit; 1 control means (function of executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112),
Second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) for causing the game revolving operation to be executed for a second operation period (fixed long period) that is equal to or longer than the shortest entry cycle;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B22, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B23, in a situation in which the game revolving operation is executed over the first operation period, in a period shorter than the shortest ball entering cycle when the game ball enters the special ball entering portion. Since the game diversion operation is completed, it becomes difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired despite the game ball entering the special ball entering section. On the other hand, in the situation where the game re-use operation is executed over the second operation period, the game play is continued for a period equal to or longer than the shortest entry cycle in the case where the game ball enters the special ball entering portion. Since the use operation continues, it is possible to cause a situation in which the player pays attention to the game use operation.

Feature B24. The gaming machine according to Feature B23, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

According to the characteristic B24, since the first operation period is only one type, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature B25. A predetermined information storage unit (second special view reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, a grant determination means (step S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that determines whether or not the predetermined information is grant corresponding information corresponding to grant of a privilege. Function for executing the process of S1105),
Equipped with
The game time control means is adapted to execute the game time operation when the grant determination is carried out by the grant determination means,
The first control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in addition to the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game diverting operation. The game machine according to feature B23 or B24, characterized in that, when the game turning operation triggered by information is executed, the game turning operation is executed over the first operation period. ..

According to the characteristic B25, in the situation where a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game rejuvenation operation is executed with the execution of the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information, the special entry The game diversion operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entering cycle in the case where the game balls enter the club. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball will newly enter the special ball unit even though the predetermined information storage unit already stores a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special ball entering section.

Feature B26. And a predetermined information storage unit (second special view reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
The game time control means is adapted to execute the game time operation when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B25, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

According to the feature B26, when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game turning operation is being executed. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature B27. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and is a period that is less than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and a number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. A gaming machine described in Feature B26.

According to the characteristic B27, in the case where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the game use operation is executed over the second operation period by using the predetermined information as an execution trigger, the game time is concerned. While it is possible to store a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the game operation is being executed, in the special ball entrance section in the situation where the game turning operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent a game ball of a number larger than a predetermined number from entering the ball.

Feature B28. When the second control means executes the game reusing operation in a situation where the predetermined information other than the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game reusing operation is not stored in the predetermined information storing means, The gaming machine according to feature B26 or B27, wherein the game reusing operation is executed over the second operation period.

According to the characteristic B28, when the game revolving operation is executed with the predetermined information as an execution trigger in a situation where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game revolving operation has the shortest entry. It is executed over the second operation period which is a period equal to or longer than the product of the cycle and the predetermined number. As a result, in a case where the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game diversion operation, the predetermined information storage means stores the predetermined number of predetermined information. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B29. A predetermined information storage unit (second special view reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, a grant determination means (step S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that determines whether or not the predetermined information is grant corresponding information corresponding to grant of a privilege. Function for executing the process of S1105),
Equipped with
The game time control means is adapted to execute the game time operation when the grant determination is carried out by the grant determination means,
The first control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in addition to the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game diverting operation. In the case of executing the above-mentioned game turning operation triggered by execution of information, the game turning operation is executed over the first operation period,
When the second control means executes the game reusing operation in a situation where the predetermined information other than the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game reusing operation is not stored in the predetermined information storing means, The game diversion operation is executed over the second operation period,
When a game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game repetitive operation triggered by the execution of the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment corresponding information is repeatedly executed, The game turning operation in the first operation period is executed until the game turning operation is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game turning operation in the second operation period is executed in the next execution time. The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B28, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

According to the feature B29, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game reusing operation triggered by the execution of predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the game diverting operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times and then the game diverting operation in the second operation period is executed once. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game revolving operation is increased in order to prevent the situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the ball entering the special retreat part, the game revolving operation is performed. It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which the game is executed over a certain long period of time, and accordingly, it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect preferable.

Feature B30. It is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of step S2105 to step S2110 in the MPU 123) for executing a predetermined effect when the game reusing operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine described in Characteristic B29.

According to the characteristic B30, in order to prevent the situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the ball entering the special ball entering portion, the regular execution is performed in the configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game replay operation is improved. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect.

Feature B31. When a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the above-mentioned specific number of game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B30, characterized in that a process for increasing the number of different game balls can be executed by the specific number or more.

According to the characteristic B31, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner. In this case, a certain number or more of game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more can be executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means while the number of game balls available to the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature B32. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes a ball to enter the special ball entering portion by the time the distribution state makes one revolution, the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one revolution. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the above, a process for increasing the number of game balls which is given to the player or the number of game balls which can be used by the player by more than the specified number. The game machine according to feature B31, wherein the game is executed.

According to the characteristic B32, when the game balls are supplied to the sorting means in a state in which the ball may enter the special ball entering portion, the sorting means is sorted by the sorting means by one round. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by the specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is played such that a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state in which a ball may enter the special ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not decreasing.

Feature B33. When the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not cause the game ball distributed to the special ball-in part to occur until the distribution state makes one round, the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special ball. Equipped with a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special ball portion until the distribution state makes one round, the game balls of the specific number or more are played. The game machine according to feature B31 or B32, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to a player or usable by a player by the specific number or more is executed.

According to the feature B33, the game balls sorted by the sorting means enter the special ball entering section even if the ball does not enter the special ball entering section. Then, based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entering section, a certain number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that the player can use is increased by a certain number or more. The process of is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the special ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

Feature B34. A special ball entering section (special winning section 142) into which game balls that have been distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means but do not enter the special ball entering section enter;
A process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or giving the player more than the specified number of game balls based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entering section. The game machine according to the feature B31 or B32, characterized in that

According to the feature B34, the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special entrance portion even if they have not entered the special entrance portion. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entering section, a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or more than a specific number of game balls is given to the player. To be executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the special ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B34, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the flow-down mode of the game balls in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A first variable provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down a game area (game area PA) is possible and a second state in which the game ball is impossible or difficult to enter. Ball entry means (first special drawing winning device 33),
A second variable ball entering means (a second state) which is switchably provided to each of a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult 2 special drawing winning device 34),
A lottery process is executed on the basis of occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable ball means, and a lottery process is executed on the basis of occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball means. And the lottery process executed based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means and the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means. A lottery execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1001, S1102, and S1103 in the MPU 112) in which the execution mode of the lottery process is different from the process;
A predetermined ball entry part (branch entrance 61) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which the game balls entering the predetermined entrance portion flow down,
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c) and a second area (second lead-out area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67) to
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first giving means (step S704, step S705 and step in the MPU 112) for causing the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state. Function for executing the processing of S908),
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second giving means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state. Function for executing the process of S910),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering device, and the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entering device. To be executed. The former lottery process and the latter lottery process differ in the manner of execution of the lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution timing of the lottery processing, and it is also possible to diversify the execution mode of the lottery processing corresponding to the execution timing of the lottery processing.

In this case, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second variable The variable ball entering means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entering means that is in the first state differs depending on the guide mode by the guide means, and the player to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of.

Feature C2. In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means, the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means has occurred. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which is more advantageous to the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

According to the characteristic C2, the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means is more advantageous to the player than the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means. As a result, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entrance portion, the player expects that the game ball is guided to the second area, and in which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion exists. It is possible to raise the player's attention as to whether or not the player is guided.

Feature C3. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area or the probability of flowing into the first area is the first area. Is higher than the probability of flowing into different areas,
When the game state is the second game state (second high probability state), the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area or the probability that the game ball flows into the second area is in the first area. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, which has a configuration higher than the probability of inflow.

According to the characteristic C3, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion will flow into the first area or into the first area is high, while in the second game state the predetermined passage portion will be The probability that the game ball flowing down will flow into the second region or will flow into the second region is high. Thereby, a lottery process triggered by the game ball entering the first variable ball entering device is easily executed, and a lottery process triggered by the game ball entering the second variable ball entering device. It is possible to create a state in which is easily executed.

Feature C4. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
As a situation in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the probability of being in the first situation or being in the first situation is higher than the probability of being in the second situation. Is also a high configuration,
In the second game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the probability of being in the second situation or being in the second situation is higher than the probability of being in the first situation. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, which has a high configuration.

According to the characteristic C4, the predetermined ball entering portion cannot or cannot enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance portion will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. In the situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. In addition, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering section. Is or is likely to be in the second situation. Thereby, in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state in which is easily inflowed.

Feature C5. In the game area, a plurality of supplied game balls including a predetermined distribution direction and a specific distribution direction are provided on the upstream side of the predetermined insertion portion, the first variable insertion means and the second variable insertion means. Sorting means (first sorting mechanism 71, second sorting mechanism 72) for sorting in any one of the sorting directions and sequentially changing the sorting direction when a game ball is supplied. Prepare,
The first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are arranged side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and on the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the game balls are supplied toward the aggregation area.

According to the characteristic C5, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction. The game balls are supplied toward the aggregation area in which the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are provided. With this, by playing the game balls so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means, the game balls can be supplied to the predetermined ball entering part in a predetermined order, and the predetermined ball entering part is also provided. It is possible to supply the game ball to the variable ball entering means corresponding to the guided area regardless of whether the game ball entered in is guided to the first area or the second area.

In particular, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are provided side by side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. When the variable ball entering means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball entering means provided on the downstream side. Accordingly, even if the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are not configured to be individually distributed by the distributing means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.

According to the characteristic C6, when a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner.

Feature C7. Only the game balls that are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the predetermined insertion part, and only the game balls that are distributed in the specific distribution direction by the distribution means are The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, wherein the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means can enter the side in the first state.

According to the characteristic C7, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the predetermined ball entry portion, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to have a desired frequency of entry.

Feature C8. Characteristic C5 to C7, characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the specific distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic C8, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls are distributed in the specific distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means, and thus the predetermined ball entering portion. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball is entered to when the game ball is supplied to the aggregation area of the first variable ball means or the second variable ball means.

Feature C9. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball receiving portion (through winning portion 36).
Another sorting direction is set as the sorting direction by the sorting unit,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion,
When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the specific distribution direction, a special number in the specific distribution direction until the distribution means becomes in a state of distributing the game balls in the separate distribution direction. It is a configuration in which the game balls of
The gaming machine is
When the first variable ball entering means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of game balls into the first area, that the number of game balls have been switched to the first variable ball entering means. Means for setting the first variable ball entering means to the second state based on the above (a function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112),
When the second variable ball entering means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of game balls into the second area, that the number of game balls have been switched to the second variable ball entering means. Means for setting the second variable ball entering means to the second state based on the above (a function of executing the processing of steps S807 to S810 in the MPU 112),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching trigger number.

According to the characteristic C9, the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state on the condition that at least one of the game balls has entered the specific ball entering portion. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance portion also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific ball entrance portion. Further, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, the game sphere is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined distribution ball The game balls are supplied toward the section, and the game balls are supplied toward the aggregation area when the distribution direction by the distribution unit is the specific distribution direction. This makes it possible to sequentially supply the game balls toward the respective ball entry points by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means.

In the above configuration, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, after the switching means number of game balls are supplied by the distributing means toward the first variable ball entering means, the distribution of the distributing means is performed. When the minute state becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific ball entering portion, and the second variable ball entering means is in the first state, the switching trigger number by the distributing means toward the second variable ball entering means. After the game balls have been supplied, the distribution state of the distribution means becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entrance portion. Thereby, when the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion after the variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering portion in the situation where the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the second state.

Feature C10. Switching control means (normal figure fluctuation in MPU 112) for controlling switching of the predetermined ball entering portion into each of a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult It has a function to execute middle processing and normal processing during normal operation.
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball receiving portion (through winning portion 36).
Another sorting direction is set as the sorting direction by the sorting unit,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion,
As a situation in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entering portion There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second area,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high-probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in the situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. The configuration has a higher probability than the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation is the second situation or the second situation in the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than that of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, after the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the different distribution direction by the distribution means, A game ball supplied to the distribution means, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first region,
In the second situation, when the game balls are being supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls are distributed to the different distribution direction by the distribution means. The game ball that has been supplied to the distribution means afterwards and that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the second region, according to any one of features C5 to C9. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic C10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering portion is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion. In such a situation, the first situation or the first situation is likely to occur. In addition, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering section. Is or is likely to be in the second situation. Thereby, in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and in a situation where the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state in which is easily inflowed.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game balls are supplied to the specific ball-in portion in the first situation, the game balls are distributed to the distribution means after a predetermined number. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entrance part and are supplied to the first area. In the second situation, the game balls supplied to the specific ball entrance part are supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of them. A game ball that enters a predetermined ball entering portion and is supplied to the second area. Thereby, while keeping the operation mode of the distribution means in common, it is possible to supply the game ball to the first area in the first situation and to supply the game ball to the second area in the second situation. It will be possible. In addition, while the number of game balls required from the supply of the game balls to the specific ball entering portion to the supply of the game balls to the predetermined ball entering portion is the common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. It is possible to supply the game balls to the second area in the second situation by supplying the balls.

Feature C11. When the switching control is started, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second region in the second period. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing the processing of steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112),
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the different distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control so that the first period is reached when the game ball that has been supplied to the sorting means and that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion passes through the guide position by the guide means. The start timing of is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are being supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls are distributed to the different distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control such that the second period is reached when a game ball that has been supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the predetermined ball insertion portion passes through the guide position by the guide means. The starting point is set, the gaming machine according to Feature C10.

According to the characteristic C11, only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entrance portions corresponding to the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic C10 can be obtained. It will be possible.

Feature C12. An operation execution means (universal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation on the basis of a game ball entering the specific ball entering unit,
The switching control means, when executing the switching control, is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started on the basis of the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. Yes,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during the period corresponding to the second situation. The operation control means for causing the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation (the function of executing the processing of step S407 and step S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the step S1211 and step of the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature C11, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S1212).

According to the characteristic C12, only by adjusting the period in which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means in correspondence with each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic C10 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature C13. When a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the above-mentioned specific number of game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. A game machine according to any one of features C5 to C12, characterized in that a process for increasing the number of different game balls can be executed by the specific number or more.

According to the characteristic C13, when a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner. In this case, a certain number or more of game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more can be executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means while the number of game balls available to the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature C14. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes a ball to enter the predetermined ball entering portion before the distribution state makes one rotation, the distribution means before the distribution state makes one rotation. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the above, a process for increasing the number of game balls which is given to the player or the number of game balls which can be used by the player by more than the specified number. The game machine according to feature C13, wherein the game machine is executed.

According to the characteristic C14, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance portion, the distribution state is distributed by the distribution means by one round. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by the specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not decreasing.

Feature C15. A special case in which the game balls distributed by the distribution unit enter when the game balls distributed by the distribution unit do not cause the ball to enter the predetermined ball entering unit until the distribution state makes one round. Equipped with a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special ball portion until the distribution state makes one round, the game balls of the specific number or more are played. The gaming machine according to the feature C13 or C14, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to a player or usable by the player by the specific number or more is executed.

According to the characteristic C15, the game balls sorted by the sorting means enter the special entry part even if the entry into the predetermined entry part does not occur. Then, based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entering section, a certain number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that the player can use is increased by a certain number or more. The process of is executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

Feature C16. A special ball entering section (special winning section 142) into which game balls that have been distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means but do not enter the predetermined ball entering section enter;
A process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or giving the player more than the specified number of game balls based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entering section. The game machine according to the feature C13 or C14, characterized in that

According to the characteristic C16, the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entering part even if they do not enter the predetermined ball entering part. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entering section, a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or more than a specific number of game balls is given to the player. To be executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C16, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group C, it is possible to solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The distribution means for distributing the game balls supplied in the game area to any of a plurality of kinds of distribution directions, and the distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied (the first embodiment Then, a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72, a first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and a third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162 in the fifth embodiment. ,
When a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the above-mentioned specific number of game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. A game machine characterized in that processing for increasing the number of game balls can be executed by the specified number or more.

According to the feature D1, by supplying the game balls to the distributing means, the game balls are sequentially supplied to the respective areas corresponding to the respective distributing directions of the distributing means. Also, when a certain number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It becomes possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a fixed manner. In this case, a certain number or more of game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more can be executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means while the number of game balls available to the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature D2. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entrance portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) A game ball is supplied toward the second special prize winning device 34),
When the game ball distributed by the distribution means causes the ball to enter the predetermined ball entering portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the distribution means makes one round by the distribution state. Based on the winning by at least a part of each of the distributed game balls, a process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or increasing the number of game balls available to the player to be equal to or more than the specified number is performed. The gaming machine described in the feature D1, which is executed.

According to the characteristic D2, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball input part, the distribution state is distributed by the distribution means by one round. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by the specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not decreasing.

Feature D3. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entrance portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) A game ball is supplied toward the second special prize winning device 34),
A special case in which the game balls distributed by the distribution unit enter when the game balls distributed by the distribution unit do not cause the ball to enter the predetermined ball entering unit until the distribution state makes one round. A ball winning portion (special winning portion 142 in the third embodiment, special winning portion 155 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) is provided,
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special ball portion until the distribution state makes one round, the game balls of the specific number or more are played. The game machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized in that a process for increasing the number of game balls given to a player or usable by the player is performed by the specific number or more.

According to the characteristic D3, the game balls sorted by the sorting means enter the special entry part even if the entry into the predetermined entry part does not occur. Then, based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entering section, a certain number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that the player can use is increased by a certain number or more. The process of is executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

Feature D4. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entrance portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) A game ball is supplied toward the second special prize winning device 34),
A special ball-in portion in which game balls that have been distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means but do not enter the predetermined ball-in portion enter (special prize portion 142 in the third embodiment, fourth embodiment In the form and the fifth embodiment, a special winning portion 155) is provided,
A process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or giving the player more than the specified number of game balls based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entering section. The gaming machine described in the feature D1 or D2, characterized in that

According to the feature D4, the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special entrance portion even if they do not enter the predetermined entrance portion. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entering section, a process for increasing the number of game balls available to the player or more than a specific number of game balls is given to the player. To be executed. As a result, when the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the amount.

Feature D5. A special ball entering means (special electric prize winning device 35) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the sorting means is provided on the downstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the special entrance means.

According to the feature D5, the game balls that have been supplied to the special ball entering means but have not entered the special ball entering means are supplied to the sorting means, and a specific number of the game balls are supplied to the sorting means. Based on the winning by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round by the supply of the game balls, a certain number or more of the game balls are given to the player. A process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given or can be used by the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the special ball entering means, while substantially not reducing the number of game balls available to the player. ..

Feature D6. Sorting guide means for guiding the game balls, which have been supplied to the special ball entering means and which have not entered the special ball entering means, to the sorting means (in the third embodiment, a guiding section 141, a guiding part 151 in the fourth embodiment, and a guiding part 163 in the fifth embodiment), the gaming machine described in the feature D5.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to surely supply the game balls that have been supplied toward the special ball entering means and have not entered the special ball entering means to the sorting means. Becomes

Feature D7. Means (MPU112) for shifting the game state to a special game state in which the special ball entering means is repeatedly switched between the first state and the second state based on that the lottery result of the lottery process is a winning result. A function of executing the processing of step S1009 in step S1009) is provided, and the gaming machine described in the characteristic D5 or D6.

According to the characteristic D7, even if the game ball supplied toward the special ball entering means does not enter the special ball entering means in the special game state, the game ball is supplied to the sorting means. Then, based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round, A certain number or more of game balls can be given to the player, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a certain number or more can be executed. As a result, even if the game ball is supplied to the special ball entering means in the special game state but the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means, a decrease in the game ball due to that amount substantially occurs. It becomes possible not to do it.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D7, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A specific winning portion (through winning portion 36) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
A predetermined ball entry portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, a second special prize in the fourth and fifth embodiments) Device 34),
Any of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction, which are provided on the upstream side of the specific entrance ball portion and the predetermined entrance ball portion in the game area and are supplied with the game ball. Sorting means (first sorting mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment) for sorting the crab and sequentially changing the sorting direction when a game ball is supplied.
Equipped with
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entering portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In this case, the game balls are supplied toward the predetermined ball-in portion,
The period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position at which the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position is the distribution The game balls distributed by the means in the second distribution direction become longer than the period required to reach the position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entrance portion from the predetermined height position. A gaming machine characterized in that a passage structure from the sorting means to the specific ball entering portion and a passage configuration from the sorting means to the predetermined ball entering portion are set.

According to the characteristic E1, by supplying the game balls to the distributing means, the game balls are sequentially supplied to the respective areas corresponding to the respective distributing directions of the distributing means. In this case, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position is more distributed. The game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the means are set to be longer than the period required to reach the position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entrance portion from the predetermined height position. It is possible to secure a long period of time from when the game ball enters the ball portion until the game ball reaches the specific ball portion. In addition, since the entry period as described above is set by the passage configuration from the sorting means to the specific entry portion and the passage configuration from the sorting means to the predetermined entry portion, It becomes possible to produce the above-mentioned effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature E2. A specific guide passage portion (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entrance ball portion,
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the predetermined ball entering portion,
Equipped with
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific entrance ball portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage portion to the predetermined entrance ball portion. The game machine according to feature E1, which is set to be large.

According to the characteristic E2, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific entrance ball portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage portion to the predetermined entrance ball portion. By the setting, the period required for the game balls distributed by the distribution means in the first distribution direction to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry part from the predetermined height position, It is possible to make it longer than the period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entrance portion from the predetermined height position. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion after the predetermined ball entering portion is in the second state based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion. It becomes possible to do so, and in a situation where the predetermined ball entrance portion is in the second state, it becomes possible to generate the entrance of the game ball into the specific ball entrance portion. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects by simply adjusting the passage length dimensions of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

Feature E3. Characteristic E1 characterized in that the game ball supplied to the distributing means after one is distributed to the first distributing direction after one of the game balls distributed in the second distributing direction by the distributing means. The gaming machine described in E2.

According to the feature E3, the game ball supplied to the sorting means next to the game ball supplied toward the predetermined ball entering part is supplied to the specific ball entering part. With this, it is possible to prevent wasteful game balls from being supplied until the game balls are supplied toward the specific ball entering part after the game balls are supplied toward the predetermined ball entering part. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above characteristic E1, the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can be moved to a position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entering portion from the predetermined height position. The time required to reach the game ball distributed by the distribution means in the second distribution direction is longer than the time required to reach the position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance portion from the predetermined height position. It is possible to lengthen it.

Feature E4. The second distribution direction is a direction vertically downward from the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means to a side different from a vertically downward direction.

According to the feature E4, the predetermined ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distribution means are supplied, and the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. By setting the period required to reach the predetermined ball entrance portion to be short, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the predetermined ball entrance portion.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features E1 to E4, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic group D and the characteristic group E, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the flow-down mode of the game balls in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A special ball portion (second special figure winning device 34) into which a game ball flowing down a game area (game area PA) can enter.
An acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) that acquires predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entering unit,
A predetermined information storage unit (second special map reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, a grant determination means (step S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that determines whether or not the predetermined information is grant corresponding information corresponding to grant of a privilege. Function for executing the process of S1105),
A game time control means (in the MPU 112) that controls the game time execution means (second special figure display portion 45b) so that the game time operation is executed corresponding to the execution of the award judgment by the award judgment means. A function of executing the processing of steps S1006 to S1008),
Equipped with
The game time control means,
In a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in addition to the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game diversion operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information is used as the execution trigger. When executing the game rejuvenation operation, the game rejuvenation for a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest game cycle when the game sphere enters the special entrance portion. First control means (a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112) for executing the operation;
In the case where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in addition to the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game reproduction operation, when the game reproduction operation is executed, Second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) for executing the game revolving operation for the second operation period (fixed long period),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic F1, in the situation where a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game rejuvenation operation is executed with the execution of the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information as a special ball, The game diversion operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entering cycle in the case where the game balls enter the club. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball will newly enter the special ball unit even though the predetermined information storage unit already stores a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special ball entering section. On the other hand, in the case where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game revolving operation is executed by using the predetermined information as an execution trigger, the game revolving operation is longer than the shortest entry cycle. It is executed over a period of time. As a result, when the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game diversion operation, the second information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature F2. The game machine according to feature F1, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

According to the feature F2, since the first operation period is only one type, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

According to the feature F3, when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game turning operation is being executed. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature F4. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and is a period that is less than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and a number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature F3.

According to the feature F4, in the case where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game use operation is executed over the second operation period with the predetermined information as an execution trigger, the game time is concerned. While it is possible to store a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the game-use operation is being executed, the special ball entering section is provided in the situation where the game-use operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent a game ball of a number larger than a predetermined number from entering the ball.

Feature F5. In the case where a game ball is supplied to the special ball entering portion in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game reusing operation is repeatedly executed with the execution of the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information. , The game turning operation in the first operation period is executed until the game turning operation is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game turning operation in the second operation period is executed in the next execution time. As described above, the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

According to the feature F5, the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game reusing operation triggered by the execution of predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the game diverting operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times and then the game diverting operation in the second operation period is executed once. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game revolving operation is increased in order to prevent the situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the ball entering the special retreat part, the game revolving operation is performed. It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which the game is executed over a certain long period of time, and accordingly, it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect preferable.

Feature F6. It is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123) for executing a predetermined effect when the game reusing operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine described in F5.

According to the characteristic F6, in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, the regular execution is performed in the configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game reusing operation is improved. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F6, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entry portion provided in the game area, the display device displays the variation of the design, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. It has been known that, in the case of, a special game state advantageous to the player is entered. When the special game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary for the game to proceed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after elapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10...Pachinko machine, 33...First special drawing winning device, 34...Second special drawing winning device, 35...Special electric winning device, 36...Thru winning part, 46...General figure display part, 61...Branch entrance, 65...Branch Passage, 65c... 1st derivation area, 65d... 2nd derivation area, 66a... Branch winning detection sensor, 67... Switching piece, 71... 1st distribution mechanism, 72... 2nd distribution mechanism, 107... Payout control device, 112... MPU, 123... MPU, 134... 2nd special figure reservation area, 142... Special winning part, 151... Guide part, 153... 2nd guide rail, 155... Special prize part, 156... 4th guide rail, 161... 3rd distribution mechanism, 162... 4th distribution mechanism, 163... Guidance part, PA... Game area.

Claims (1)

First variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult,
A second variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult. ,
A predetermined ball entering portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined passage part through which the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance part flows down,
Predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion,
A predetermined giving means for giving a privilege to the player when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means,
The game ball, which is provided on the downstream side of the detection area by the predetermined detection means in the predetermined passage portion and passes through the detection area, is guided to any one of a plurality of areas including the first area and the second area. Guidance means to do so,
A first granting means for causing the first variable ball entering means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area;
When a game ball flows into the second area, a second granting means for causing the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images